Panasonic DP 8020E Service manual

Order Number: MGCS060806C0

H21

Digital Imaging Systems

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

[ Version 1.0 ]

WARNING

This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.

It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.

Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

© 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.

2

General Annotations

9.

Important Notice

(Especially in those countries belonging to the European Union):

This product is fully compliant with the national laws transposed from the EU Directive

on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances (RoHS) in electrical and

electronic equipment, effective 1st July 2006 in the EU countries.

In order for the product to comply with the RoHS Directive, the six particular substances

(lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, and

polybrominated diphenyl ethers) have been either totally eliminated or limited to the

concentration level below maximum allowed. Consequently spare parts have been

changed to RoHS-compliant parts where applicable.

To ensure compliance with the spare parts application of the RoHS legislation, please

make sure to follow the details provided in this manual when ordering spare parts and

carrying out repairs.

The contents of this Service Manual, and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.

Published in Japan.

3

Important Notice

Please read these Instructions completely BEFORE installing any optional accessories. Installing the additional board, or connector with the power ON

(only the power switch OFF) could damage the SPC, and/or SC board.

If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power

Switch on the machine.

How to turn OFF the Power:

<Example : DP-8020>

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER

(Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the

Power Switch on the machine to the

OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY

SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to

step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER"

keys simultaneously first.

3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while

the machine writes the closing status onto

the Hard Disk Drive Unit, and advances into

"ENERGY SAVER MODE".

4. Turn the Power Switch on the machine to the OFF position.

5. Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable, if the Fax Option

is installed.

6.

Unplug the AC Power Cord.

(When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when

servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. As a precaution, disconnect the Telephone

Line Cable first, before unplugging the AC Power Cord.

WARNING

This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public. It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product. Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves

the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation, and without notice.

4

5

Caution:

Depending on your machine’s model, it may weight approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg) without any options.

To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel to lift, or move

the machine as illustrated.

Do not lift the machine by the Paper Tray as it may cause damage and/or bodily injury.

Note

:

Refer to the Installation Instructions when installing the machine.

6

Precautions

For Your Safety

To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic machine to ensure proper, and safe operation of your machine.

Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet, and is easily accessible.

This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

WARNING:

Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION:

Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.

WARNING

Power and Ground Connection Cautions

Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.

Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is required, always use a properly rated cord.

120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A

If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, it may be underrated, and the machine, or plug may emit smoke, orbecome hot to the touch.

Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.

If the power cord is damaged, or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized

Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.

dealer.

Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.

Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and cause fire.

When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord forcibly can damage it, and cause fire, or an electric shock.

When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.

If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.

Be sure to switch Off, and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause an electric shock.

7

Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual

The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.

The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.

The plug and receptacle are free of dust.

The cord is not cracked or frayed.

Operating Safeguards

Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause severe burns.

Do not place any liquid container such as a vase, or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or shock hazard.

Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.

If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.

Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.

Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause smoke or fire.

Consumable Safeguards

Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge, or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge/bottle can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.

Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children to prevent chocking or poisoning. If a button battery/verification stamp is swallowed accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.

Notice: California only:

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

CAUTION

Installation and Relocation Cautions

Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that may catch fire.

Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.

Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine.

Refer to the Specifications section for the weight of the machine.

If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.

packing materials for shipping.

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.

8

CAUTION

Operating Safeguards

Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.

Do not use a highly flammable spray, or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.

When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.

Never touch a labelled area found on, or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.

Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over, or the heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.

Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize the ozone density in the air.

When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.

Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.

Pull the paper trays out slowly to prevent injuries.

When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.

A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Consumable Safeguards

Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated, or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health.

Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or

Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.

Others

When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.

The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning strikes in your neighborhood, maintain an ample distance from the machine, and do not touch it until the lightning stops.

If you notice flickering, distorted images, or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be causing radio interference. Switch it Off, and if the interference disappears, the machine is the cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.

Move the machine, and the TV and/or radio away from each other.

Reposition or reorient the machine, and the TV and/or radio.

Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.

Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas, and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor antenna, ask your local electrician for support.

Use a coaxial cable antenna.

9

10

11

12

Specifications ........................................ 15

1.1.

Control Panel ..........................................15

1.2.

Specifications Table................................17

1.3.

Fax, Printer and Internet Fax

Functions ................................................27

1.4.

System Combination...............................38

1.5.

Options List.............................................39

1.6.

External View..........................................40

1.7.

Sensors...................................................44

1.8.

Fans and Motors.....................................44

1.9.

Clutches and Switches ...........................45

1.10. PC Boards ..............................................45

Disassembling, Cleaning and

Replacement .......................................... 46

2.1.

General Disassembly..............................46

2.2.

Disassembly Instructions ........................47

2.3.

Hardware Identification Template ...........98

Maintenance, Adjustments and

Check Points ........................................ 101

3.1.

Preventive Maintenance .......................101

3.2.

Required Tools .....................................103

3.3.

Preventive Maintenance Points ............104

3.4.

Preventive Maintenance Check List .....106

3.5.

Resetting the P/M

(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......108

3.6.

Lubrication Point List ............................109

3.7.

Updating the Firmware .........................110

3.8.

Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure

(Order) ..................................................118

3.9.

Adjusting the Printer Registration,

LSU Image Side to Side .......................121

3.10. Signal Waveform ..................................125

Troubleshooting .................................. 186

4.1.

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........186

4.2.

Improper LCD Display ..........................187

4.3.

Printed Copy Quality Problems.............188

4.4.

Document Feeder (ADF) ......................207

4.5.

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......213

4.6.

Error Codes (For Copier) ......................221

4.7.

Information Codes Table

(For Facsimile)......................................231

4.8.

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........237

4.9.

Troubleshooting (For Printer)................244

Table of Contents

Service Modes ..................................... 246

5.1.

Service Modes (For Copier) ................. 246

5.2.

Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 273

System Description ............................. 302

6.1.

Mechanical Operation .......................... 302

6.2.

Automatic Document Feeder ............... 304

6.3.

Inverting Automatic Document

Feeder.................................................. 306

6.4.

Receive Mechanism ............................. 308

Installation............................................ 318

7.1.

Set Up Precautions .............................. 318

7.2.

Unpacking ............................................ 320

7.3.

Installation Procedure .......................... 321

Options and Supplies.......................... 330

8.1.

Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation for DP-8020/8016................................. 330

8.2.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC820) .......................... 335

8.3.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC820) .................. 337

8.4.

Installing the Fax Communication

Board (DA-FG180) .............................. 339

8.5.

Installing the Keyboard Option

(DA-KB180) ......................................... 349

8.6.

Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit

(DA-HD18) ........................................... 353

8.7.

Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board

(DA-EM600) ......................................... 362

8.8.

Installing the Sorting Image Memory

16 / 64 / 128 MB

(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B) ...................... 364

8.9.

Installing the Expansion Flash Memory

Card 4/8 MB

(UE-410047/410048) ........................... 365

8.10. Installing the Accounting Software

(DA-WA10)........................................... 366

8.11. Installing the Inverting Automatic

Document Feeder (DA-AR202) ........... 367

8.12. Installing the Automatic

Document Feeder (DA-AS181) ............ 374

8.13. Installing the 2nd/4th Paper Tray

(DA-DS184), 3rd Paper Tray

(DA-DS185), and the Stand ................. 380

8.14. Installing the Platen Cover

(DA-UC200) for PU .............................. 388

8.15. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit

(DZTQ000074) ..................................... 389

13


8.16. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit for Paper Tray (DZHP009959)..............400

8.17. Installing the Mechanical Counter

(DZTK000002) ......................................408

8.18. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit

(DA-KH180) ..........................................412

8.19. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................418

General Network Information ............. 421

9.1.

Network Protocol ..................................421

9.2.

Layer Functions and Technology..........423

9.3.

Network Layer.......................................427

9.4.

Transport Layer ....................................431

9.5.

Upper Layer ..........................................433

9.6.

SMTP

(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ............438

9.7.

ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................439

9.8.

Communication Protocols.....................445

9.9.

POP

(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ...........448

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................451

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and

Mail Account Type

(SMTP or POP).....................................452

9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) - Extended Feature .................453

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications

(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................456

9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................460

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response

Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature ...............................460

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for

Authentication (SMTP Auth)


9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer


Schematic Diagram ............................. 465

10.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................465

14

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1 Specifications

1.1.

Control Panel

DP-8020 Series for PU (USA/Canada, etc.)

DP-8020E

DP-8020P

DP-8016P

OPTIONS (DP-8020E/8020P only)

Note1:

1. DP-8020P is not available for USA and Canada.

2. Model availability may differ as per destination. Please ask your sales company for details.

Note2:

LCD Display Brightness Adjustment

To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE", or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.

ORIGINAL SIZE: Dimmer

COPY SIZE

: Brighter

15

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

DP-8020 Series for Other Destinations

DP-8020E

DP-8020P

DP-8016P

OPTIONS (DP-8020E/8020P only)

Note:

Model availability may differ as per destination. Please ask your sales company for details.

Ver. 1.0

16

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.2.

Specifications Table

1.2.1.

Copy Function

Basic Specifications

1 Type

2 Platen

3 Original Position

Platen

ADF / i-ADF

4 Recording Paper Path

5 Face Up / Face Down

6 Drum

7 Copy Process

8 Developing Process

9 Toner Recycle

10 Fusing System

11 Max Original Size

12

Items

Paper Tray

Bypass Tray

Bypass Tray (Envelope)

13 Paper Weight

Paper Tray

Bypass Tray

ADU

14 Warm-up Time

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Desktop

Option

Remarks

Left / Rear

Left / Center

Center

Face Down

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)

Dry Electrostatic System

Dry Dual Components

No

Heat & Pressure

Ledger (11 x 17 in) /

A3 (297 x 420 mm)

Paper Size

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R

A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS

A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R

A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FLS

A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R

#10 (4.1 x 9.5 in)

DL (4.3 x 8.7 in)

For USA and Canada

For EU

FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in

For Other Destinations

For USA and Canada

For EU

FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in


For USA and Canada

For EU

15 First Copy Time

16 Copy Speed

Ledger / A3

A3

Legal / B4 / FLS

Letter-R / A4-R

Letter / A4

Invoice-R / A5-R

16-24 lb (60 - 90 g/m2)

15-34 lb (55 - 133 g/m2)

17-24 lb (64 - 90 g/m2)

Less than 30 sec

Less than 6.9 sec

11 cpm

11 cpm

13 cpm

16 cpm / 15 cpm

20 cpm

20 cpm

For DP-8020E

68 °F (20 °C)

From Platen, Letter/ A4 Portrait,1st

Paper Tray. Period between Start

Key is pressed and Paper ejected to the Exit Tray.

When LSU is ready.

9 cpm

10 cpm

11 cpm

13 cpm

16 cpm

16 cpm

From Platen, 1st Paper Tray, and

Paper ejected to the Exit Tray, LSU is ready, and Continuous Copy.

17

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Items

17

Enlargement

Reduction

Zoom

18 Paper Feed

Paper Tray

Capacity

Auto Size Setting

Low Level Warning

Bypass Paper Tray

Capacity

Auto Size Setting

Paper Capacity

(Std. Configuration)

19 Multi Copy Range

20 Gradation

Text

Text / Photo

Photo

21 Resolution

22 Standard Sorting Memory

Size

23 Standard Page Memory

Size

24 Exit Tray Capacity

25 Color

26 Dimensions

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Zoom

Selected Original size / Copy size

Selected Original size / Copy size

50 - 200%

Front Loading Universal Paper Tray

550 sheets x 1

No

Empty Only

50 sheets

Yes

600 sheets

999 sheets

Bi-Level

256 steps

256 steps

600 dpi

16 MB

32 MB

Standard: 250 sheets

No

(W x D x H)

22.0 x 21.9 x 18.1 in

(558 x 557 x 460 mm)

33.2 x 24.6 x 24.5 in

(844 x 624 x 623 mm)

27 Operating Space

(W x D)

33.2 x 22.2 in

(844 x 565 mm)

DP-8020E

95.46 lb (43.3 Kg)

Remarks

1% Step

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

Control Panel Selectable

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

Paper Tray 1 (Std) +

Bypass Paper Tray

Halftone by Error Diffusion

Scanning and Printing.

H: To Platen Glass.

Includes ADF / Bypass Paper Tray.

Includes Bypass Paper Tray.

For PU (USA/Canada, etc.)

*DP-8020P is not available for USA and Canada

Weight

DP-8020P*/

8016P/

DP-8020E

93.26 lb (42.3 Kg)

98.33 lb (44.6 Kg)

For EU and Other Destinations

DP-8020P/

8016P

96.12 lb (43.6 Kg)

18

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Items

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Remarks

Options

1 Paper Feed System

550 sheets 2nd

Paper Tray

Paper Size Detection

Low Level Paper

Warning

550 sheets 3rd

Paper Tray


Low Level Paper

Warning

550 sheets 4th

Paper Tray


Low Level Paper

Warning

Yes

Manual

Empty Only

Yes

Manual

Empty Only

Yes

Manual

Empty Only

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

For DP-8020/8016


For DP-8020


For DP-8020


Max. Paper Capacity

2, 250 sheets

1, 150 sheets

For DP-8020

For DP-8016

2 Stand

Stand for

4*-Paper Tray

Configuration

Stand for

3*-Paper Tray

Configuration

Stand for

2-Paper Tray

Configuration

Option

Option

Option

Low Stand with Casters

DA1D18C :For USA and

Canada Only

DA-DA191-PE :For Other

Destinations

Low Stand with Casters

DA1D18C :For USA and

Canada Only


Destinations

Mid Stand with Casters

DA1D18B :For USA and

Canada Only


Destinations

Stand for

1-Paper Tray

Configuration

Option

High Stand with Casters

DA1D18A :For USA and

Canada Only


Destinations

Note:

The same Stand (DA1D18C) is used for either 3 or 4 Paper Tray Configuration for USA and

Canada.

3 Platen Cover

Free Stop

Option

Standard

Yes

For USA and Canada


From 30 to 70 degrees.

19

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Items

4 ADF

Single Side Type

Original Set

Scanning Method

Capacity (Originals)

SADF Mode

Free Stop

5 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

Duplex Type

Original Set

Scanning Method

Capacity (Originals)

SADF Mode

Free Stop

6 Exit Tray (Inner)

Tray Position

Number of Bins

Face Up / Face Down

Bin Capacity

Multi Tray Function

Shift Tray Function

7 Finisher

8 Exit Tray (Outer)

9 Automatic Duplex Unit

10 Counter

Key Counter Capability

11 Dehumidifier

12 Sorting Image Memory

Optional Image Memory 1

(16MB)


(64MB)


(128MB)

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Option

Face Up

Sheet Through

50 sheets

Yes

Yes

Option

Face Up

Sheet Through

50 sheets

Yes

Yes

Inner

1

Face Down

250 sheets

No

No

No

No

Standard : DP-8020E

Option

Option

Yes

Yes

Yes

Remarks

For DP-8020/8016

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)


For DP-8020E

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

Available for single side scanning only.


The Harness Kit contains only

Harnesses, Bracket and a Screw.

Supplied as a Service Part.

Unit comes standard with 16 MB.

1-Slot available for an Optional

Image Memory module.

13 Hard Disk Drive Option

Additional Optional Sorting Image

Memory (Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard Disk Drive to function. (For Tandem, Remote

Copy, etc.)

20

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

Features

1 Automatic Features

Auto Magnification

Selection

Auto Paper Selection

Auto Paper Tray

Selection

Auto Start

Remote Diagnostic

Machine Stops when Out of Toner

2 Additional Features

Low Level Paper Warning

Photo Mode

Original Detection

Release

Edit / Effects

Book Mode

Edge Mode

Margin Mode

X-Y Zoom

Stamping /

Page Numbering

Inverse Mode

(Negative / Positive)

Centering Mode

Image Repeat

Mirror Mode

Others (Inverting ADF & ADU)

2-Page Copy Mode

2 in 1

4 in 1

6 in 1

8 in 1

Booklet Mode

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Yes

Empty Only

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Using ADF only

Reservation while Power On

Initializing.

Requires the Fax Communication

Board (DA-FG180) option or the

Internet Fax / E-MAIL Module

(DA-NF180) option.

PPC Function

256 steps

Manually overridden when using the Original Size keys.

With Digital Sky Shot

LDR

→ LTR x 2

(A3

→ A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)

Copy from four 1-Sided pages to 1 Booklet Mode sheet.

21

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

Duplex Copy

1

→2

2

→1

2

→2

Book

→2

1st Page BLANK

1st Page IMAGE

Image Rotation (90 or

270

°)

Electronic Sorting

Rotation Sorting

Insertion Job

Cover Mode

Page Insertion Mode

OHP Interleave Mode

Presentation Mode

Department Counter

ADF

Multi Size Feed

JOB Build and SADF

Mode

Original Counter

Job Memory

Job Time Display

Concurrent Copy

Tandem Copy Mode

Remote Copy Mode

Scan Once Print Many

Mode

Job Complete Notice

Trial Copy Mode

Weekly Timer

Function Mode

Interrupt

Electronic Counter

Digital Sky Shot Mode

Double Exposure

3 Control Panel

Display

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LCD

No

No

No

No

No

Status Lamp Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Scanning twice by turning the original.

1

→ 2/2 → 1/2 → 2

Book

→ 2

300 Departments

2 Jobs in Memory

12 Concurrent Copy Jobs

20 digits x 2 lines

GREEN: Scanning /

Printing

RED: Alarm / Warning

22

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Items

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Key

Original Size

Copy Size

Keypad

Clear

Stop

Start

Energy Saver

Multi Size Feed

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Sort Yes

Function Mode Yes

Original Detection

Release

No

Interrupt

Reset

One-Touch key

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mode Change Yes

Remarks

With Keyboard Option

Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax and Internet Fax Mode

LCD Main Indication

Message Language

(Default)

Original Size / Image

Indication

Paper Size / Image

Indication

Paper Tray Selection

Selected Paper Tray /

Tray Status

Original Mode

Selection

Copy Density Selection

Setting Confirmation

Function Classification

Zoom Magnification

Number of Copies

JOB Build and SADF /

Multi Size Feed Mode

Error Code

Finishing

Warning Indicators

Add Toner

Toner Waste

Container Full

Add Paper (No

Paper)

Add Paper

(Under 50 sheets)

English (American)

Specified Language

Yes

(without Image)

Yes

(without Image)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

For USA and Canada


Text / Text-Photo / Photo

23

SEP 2006

Items

Paper Jam Indication

Paper Jam Location

Service Alert Call

User Error

Machine Error

History of Jam Errors

4 Main Unit

Total Counter

Electronic

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mechanical Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Standard for EU.

Available as a Service Part for

Other Destinations.

Max. Weight of

Documents on the Platen

Glass

ADF with Document

Guide

Clip Pocket

Operating Instructions

Pocket

Warning / Caution Label

5 Optical System

Original Detection

Method

Scanning Method

Dehumidifier

Mechanical Multi Copy

Mode

6 Process System

Type

Toner

Toner Waste Container

Drum Life

Developer Life

Dehumidifier

Manual Add Toner

11.02 lb (5 kg)

Yes

Yes

No

Specified Language

Reflective Photo Sensor Type

600 dpi CCD

Yes

No

Separate OPC Unit and

Developer Unit Type

10 K

10 K

60 K

60 K

Yes

Yes

Supplied as a Service Part

User replacement

Supplied as a Service Part

Manually adds toner to the developer

(up to TDC threshold)

24

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Items

2 Power Consumption

Max.Power Consumption

100 VAC PS

220 VAC PS

Standby

100 VAC PS

220 VAC PS

Energy Saver

Power Saver Mode

100 VAC PS

220 VAC PS

Sleep Mode

100 VAC PS

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

PM Cycle

1 PM Cycle

Major PM

Minor PM (Cleaning)

Packing Configuration

120 K

60 K

1 Packing Dimension

2 Packing Weight

1 Power Requirement

28.5 x 28.6 x 34.1 in

(724 x 727 x 866 mm)

28.4 x 28.4 x 29.5 in

(722 x 722 x 750 mm)

123.46 lb

(56 kg)

121.25 lb

(55 kg)

130.07 lb

(59 kg)

114.64 lb

(52 kg)

127.87 lb

(58 kg)

112.44 lb

(51 kg)

3 Accessories

Process Unit Yes

Developer No

Toner


No

No

Operating Instructions

Power Supply

Yes

99 - 132 VAC 47 - 63 Hz

Single phase

180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz

Single phase

Less than 1.3 KW

Less than 1.3 KW

120 W

120 W

19.0 W

19.5 W

8.5 W

220 VAC PS 9.5 W

Remarks

For USA, Canada and China


For USA and Canada

For China


120 VAC

220 - 240 VAC

Turns On the Heater Power.

Automatically enters the Sleep or

Shutdown Mode after 10 minutes from the Standby or Energy Saver

Mode.

Manually enters the Energy Saver

Mode by pressing the Energy

Saver key.

Sleep or Shutdown mode is controlled by the General

Functions setting.

Shutdown Mode

100 VAC PS

220 VAC PS

1.4 W

1.6 W

Network Function not available

25

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

1 Temperature

2 Relative Humidity

3 Safety

4 Energy Saver

5 EMI

Items

6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P DP-8016P

Ambient Conditions

50 - 80

°F / 10 - 30 °C

Remarks

30 - 80% RH

UL60950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.60950-1 For USA and Canada

EN60950-1 / IEC60950-1

Energy Star Compliant


Class A computing device in FCC

Rules Part 15

Class B

EN55022, EN55024,

EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3,

CISPR22

This Product uses Lead Free (PbF)

PCBs

For USA and Canada


Refer to the Parts Manual for details

Ver. 1.0

26

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.3.

Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions

1.3.1.

Fax Function

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

Items

Main Specifications

1 Compatibility

2 PSTN Line Port

3 Leased Line Port

4 V.24 Line Port

5 Modem Speed

6 Coding Scheme

7 ECM

G3

Yes

No

No

33.6 - 2.4 kbps

JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

Yes

8 Short Protocol

9 Transmission Speed

Yes (B, D)

Approx. 2.9 sec

10

Communication Resolution dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ mm)

Transmission

Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)

Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)

S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)

600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

Reception

Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)

Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)

S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)

600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

Scanner Mechanism

1 Scanning Device

2 Scanning Speed (ADF)

Resolution

Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ mm)

Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ mm)

S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x

15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm)

600dpi: 600 x 600

3 Scanning Speed (Platen)

Resolution

600dpi: 600 x 600

CCD (ADF / Platen)

Vertical Horizontal

0.9 / 1.0 sec 0.7 sec

1.8 / 2.0 sec 1.4 sec

2.8 sec 2.1 sec

4

Scanning Resolution dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/ mm)

Vertical Horizontal

2.8 sec 2.1 sec

Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)

Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)

S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)

600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

Remarks

ITU-T Std & Non-Std

1-Line Only

T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter

Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30

ECM

ITU-T Image No. 1

(A4, Std Resolution)

600 dpi communication is only possible between T.30 Compliant

Panafax, WORKiO, and other

T.30 compliant machines.

LTR / A4, Scanned in Vertical or

Horizontal Direction.

Excluding Initializing Time and

ADF slipping factor.

27

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

5 Document Size (Max.)

6 Effective Scanning Width

7 A3 size TX/RX

8 Reduction XMT

9 ADF Capacity

10 Collation Stack

Printer Mechanism

1 Recording Method

2 Recording Speed

3 Recording Resolution Fax

4 Recording Paper Size

5 Effective Printing Width

6 Recording Paper Capacity

7 Collation Stack

8 Consumable

Fax Memory

1 Standard Memory

2 Optional Memory

Dual Operation

1 Multi Task Operation

2 Direct XMT Reserve

3 Memory XMT Reserve

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

ADF: LDR / A3

LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)

Yes

Yes

50 sheets

Yes

LP

23 / 30 ppm

(A4 Horizontal)

600 x 600 dpi

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Conforms to ITU-T A3

LDR to LTR / A3 to B4 / A3 to A4

/ B4 to A4

Face-Up, feed from top page

LTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m

2

)

Face Down

Ledger / Legal / Letter /

A3 / B4 / A4 / A5

11.4 in (289 mm)

600 sheets

Yes

Toner Bottle, Developer,

OPC Drum

Recording Speed attained after the 1st copy.

Invoice : Not supported.

Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size for N. American models. If A3 is received, approx. 1" of image on both edges are not printed on

Ledger size paper.

Conforms to ITU-T A3

Optional max. 2250 sheets

LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75

g/m

2

)

Face Down

2 MB (120 pages)

4 MB

8 MB

Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1

(A4, Std Resolution)

Expansion Flash Memory Card, using ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std

Resolution)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Max. 50 files

28

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

Dialing/Telephone Features

1 One-Touch Keys

2 One-Touch / Program Keys

3 One-Touch Auto Dialers

4 Abbr. Auto Dialers

5 Total Auto Dialers

6 Directory Search Dialing

7 Max. Tel Number Digits

8 Max. Station Name

Characters

10 Direct Dialing

(Monitor Dialing)

11 Automatic Redialing

12 Manual Redialing

13 Line Monitor Speaker

14 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)

15 Pulse / Tone Dialing

16 Pulse to Tone Change

17 Flash Key

18 Handset

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

28

4

32

200

232

Yes

36

15

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Requires Optional Keyboard.

Plus an additional 800 stations available to select from, when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-

HD18) is installed.

Max. 50 stations

Voice mode

Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min. intervals

Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button

In Monitor Dialing mode only

10 pps / DTMF

Ver. 1.0

29

SEP 2006

Items

Transmission Features

1 Direct Transmission

2 Memory Transmission

6 Deferred Transmission

8 Priority Direct Transmission

10 Batch Transmission

12 Cover Sheet

13 Confidential Mail Box

14 Multi-Copy Transmission

15 Memory Back-Up

16 Duplex Scanning

Reception Features

1 Substitute Reception

2 Fixed Reduction

3 Auto Reduction

4 Overlap Printing

5 Receive to Memory

8 Duplex Printing

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Page Retransmission

Max. 250 stations

ADF Deferred Transmission

Max. 50 timers

Priority ADF Transmission

Real Time (up to 5 Files)

FAX : Back-up with Flash

Memory.

Copy / Printer : No Back-up with

D-RAM

With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%

(in 1% Steps),

Top & Left Alignment

LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%

(in 1% Steps),

Top & Left Alignment

Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)

30

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

Polling

1 Polling

2 Turnaround Polling

3 Multi-Station Polling

4 Deferred Polling

6 Direct Polling Tx

7 Memory Polling Tx

8 Preset Polling Password

10 Continuous Polling

Convenience

1 Panel Display

2 Voice Contact

3 Edit File Mode

4 Incomplete File Save

5 Automatic Cover Sheet

Certainty

1 Verification Stamp

2 Header / Total Page Print

3 Transaction Journal

4 Comm. Journal

5 Last Ind. XMT Journal

List Printouts

1 One-Touch List

2 ABBR. No. List

3 Program List

4 Address Book Search List

5 Fax Parameter List

6 File List

7 Ind. XMT Journal

8 Directory Sheet

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

LCD

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Max. 250 stations

Max. 50 timers

Max. 50 timers / 250 stations

1 File

With View Mode

With View Mode

200 Transactions / with View

Mode

With Image Data

Auto Dialer List

With View Mode

31

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

Identifications

1 Logo

2 Multiple Logo

3 Character ID

4 Numeric ID

Special Communications

1 Password XMT / RCV

2 Selective Reception

3 Relay XMT Request

4 Relay XMT Center

5 Confidential XMT / Polling

6 Confidential Center

7 Mailbox XMT / Polling

8 Mailbox Center

9 File XMT

10 Fax Forward

11 Sub-Address XMT

12 Sub-address RCV

13 OMR-XMT

Others

1 Fax Access Code

2 PIN Code Access

3 Intelligent Redial (AI)

4 Department Code

5 Power Saver Mode

6 Self Diagnostic Function

8 Check & Call Function

9 V.24 / Encryption Interface

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

25 Characters

16 Characters

20 Digits

TSI Check

Received File Transfer

(Only with Internet Fax Option)

T. Routing

For USA and Canada only

5 Files

300 Departmental Codes

Ver. 1.0

32

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.3.2.

Printer Function

Items

Interface

1 Centronics Parallel I/F

2 LAN (Network)

3 USB Port

4 IEEE-1394

Printer Function

1 Printing Size

2 Bypass Paper Tray

3 Stapling

4 Printing Resolution (dpi)

5 Interface

6 OS

7 Printer Work Memory Size

8 GDI

9 PDL (PCL6)

10 PDL (PS3)

11 Duplex Printing

12 Collation Stack

13 Status Monitor

Network

USB

14 Network Printing

15 Smoothing

16 Applicable PC

17 Multi-Task Operation

Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory

Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory

Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing

Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing

Description

DP-8020E/P DP-8016P

No

Ethernet 10Base-T/

100Base-TX

Yes

No

USB

Remarks

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada

A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EU

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R

Yes


No

Max. 1200 (Equivalent) x 600 dpi

Selectable 600 dpi, with

Smoothing, the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers (1200 dpi

Equivalent).

USB / Ethernet

Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 /

Win 2000 / XP / Windows Server

2003 / MAC 8.6-10.1

20 MB

Yes

Yes

MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only.

Not expandable

Yes

Yes

Requires Optional PCL6

Emulation Kit.

Requires Optional PS / PCL6

Emulation Kit (Except DP-8016)

DP-8020E only.

Custom Size/Post Card Size is not available.

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC MAC is PS only.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

33

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

19 Font

Items

Description

DP-8020E/P DP-8016P

No

Yes

20 Mailbox Yes

21 Secure Mailbox Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

Requires Optional PCL6 or PS /

PCL6 Emulation Kit

Requires Optional HDD Unit.

Max. 100 Users.

Max. 20 mailboxes for each User

ID

Requires Optional HDD Unit.

Max. 100 Users.

Max. 20 mailboxes for each User

ID

Ver. 1.0

34

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.3.3.

Network Scanner Function

Interface

1 Centronics Parallel I/F

2 LAN (Network)

3 USB Port

4 IEEE-1394

Network Scanning Function

1 Scanning Device

2

Scanning Speed

(ADF / I-ADF)

3 Halftone

4 Max. Document Size

5

Scanning Resolution

(dpi)

6 OS

Items

7 2-Sided Scanning

8 File Format

9 Completion Notice

10 Protocol

Network Address Features

1 One Touch Address Keys

2 Abbr. Address Numbers

Description

DP-8020E

No

Ethernet 10Base-T/

100Base-TX

No

No

DP-8020P

Remarks

CCD (i-ADF / ADF / Platen)

600 x 600 : 2.1 sec

300 x 300 : 1.1 sec

150 x 150 : 1.1 sec

256 Halftone shades

Ledger, A3

600 x 600

300 x 300

150 x 150

Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 /

XP / Windows Server 2003

Yes

Mult-page TIFF / PDF

Yes

Letter / A4

With Error Diffusion

Selectable, 600 dpi Optical

Scanner

With i-ADF.

TIFF can also be converted to

PDF with the PDMS Software

Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen

(requires Network Status Monitor

- installed with PDMS Software)

TCP/IP, Non-Std

32

60

Requires Optional Keyboard.

Shared with Fax/Internet Fax

One Touch Address, 32 in Total

Independent for Network

Scanner

Ver. 1.0

35

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.3.4.

Internet Fax Function

Items

Main Specifications

1 Communication Protocols

2 Max. Modem Speed

3 Coding Scheme

4 File Format

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

SMTP / POP3 / MIME

NA

JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

TIFF / PDF

5 Line Interface

Scanner Mechanism

1 Max. Document Size

2 Effective Scanning Width

3

Scanning Resolution dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/mm)

RJ-45

Ledger, A3

11.4 in (289 mm)

Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)

Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)

S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)

600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

Printer Mechanism

1 Printing Resolution

2 Effective Recording Width

Transmission Features

600 dpi

11.4 in (289 mm)

1 Multi-Task Operation Yes

2 Memory Transmission Yes

Yes

4

Simultaneous Multi-Station

Transmission

5 Sender Selection

Yes

7 Deferred Transmission

8 Fax Forward

9 Sub-address RCV

10 Mail Header

Email Header Print Selection

Subject Line

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Random Entry

Remarks

Selectable

PDF file is only available if sending to PC (Network

Scanner).

Ethernet LAN

LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4

Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting

Simultaneous operation of G3

Fax and LAN is available.

Max. 250 stations

(200 Address Book + 50 Full

Number

Dialing)

Received File Transfer, only with

Internet Fax Option

Inbound Routing, only with

Internet Fax Option

All or From / To / Subject only

36

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Items

LAN Features

1 Internet Fax Communication

2 Internet Mail Reception

3 Internet Fax Server Features

Internet Fax Relay XMT

Email Relay MXT

Received Fax / Email

Forward

PC to FAX Transmission

Inbound Routing

Phone Book Registration from

PC

ID

5 Internet Delivery Confirmation

6 Network Scanning

7 Network Printing

LPR / LPD

GDI

PDL

8 DHCP Client

9 LDAP

10 TIFF Viewer

Certainty

1 Comm. Journal (w / Image)

1 Email Address

Description

DP-8020E DP-8020P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remarks

A3 Communication is available with Parameter setting.

Internet Fax

→ Internet Fax →

G3FAX

PC

→ Internet Fax → G3FAX

Local print available

Using Sub-Address.

Local print available

Via Email

With MDN

600 dpi

600 dpi

600 dpi

Requires Optional PCL6 or PS

Emulation Kit

Lightweight Directory Access

Protocol

Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer

Ver. 1.0

37

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.4.

System Combination

Panel

(PNL PC Board)

Key Counter

Harness Option

Dehumidifier

Heater Kit

Expansion Flash

Memory Card

4 or 8M

ADF PC Board

Scanner Unit

(SPC PC Board)

ADF

Inverting ADF (DP-8020E only)

Document Sensor

Motor

Main PC Board

(SC PC Board)

Automatic

Duplex Unit

(DP8020E only)

Electronic Sorting Memory

Image Memory

16, 64, 128MB

Either Option

PCL6

Emulation Option

PS/PCL6

Emulation Option

Network

Scanner Option

Internet Fax/

E-Mail Option

Fax Communication

Option (FXB/MJR)

Printer

USB

Interface

10/100 Ethernet

Interface

Hard Disk

Drive Option

SPC PC Board

2nd Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)

3rd Paper Tray (CST3 PC Board)

4th Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)

Standard Configuration

Option

38

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.5.

Options List

■

Options

Option Name

Printer Controller Module (PCL)

Multi Page Description Language

Controller Module (PCL/PostScript)

Fax Communication Board

Keyboard Option

Option Number

DA-PC820

DA-MC820

DA-FG180

DA-KB180

Remarks

Printer Controller for PCL6*

Printer Controller for PCL6/PS3*

For DP-8020E/8020P* only

G3 Fax Communication

Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD18

DA-EM600

UE-410047

UE-410048

DA-SM16B

DA-SM64B

DA-SM28B

DA-WA10

DA-UC200

DA-AS181

DA-AR202

DA-DS184

DA-DS185

DA1D18A

DA1D18B

DA1D18C

Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory

(Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard

Disk Drive to function.

(For additional 800 address book, etc.)

F-ROM Board (8 MB) Expansion Board

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8MB

Image Memory (16MB)

Image Memory (64 MB)

Image Memory (128MB)

Accounting Software

Platen Cover

Automatic Document Feeder

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

2nd / 4rd Paper Tray

3rd Paper Tray

Deluxe Stand (High)

Deluxe Stand (Mid)

Deluxe Stand (Low)

Additional Memory for Fax / Internet Fax

For Electronic Sorting

For Accounting Function

Available in Specified Destinations

For DP-8020E

4th Paper Tray is for DP-8020E only.

3rd Paper Tray is for DP-8020E only.

For USA and Canada

Note:

The same Deluxe Stand (DA1D18C) is used for either 3 or 4 Paper Tray

Configuration.

Stand (1-Paper Tray Configuration)




Key Counter Harness Kit

DA-DA188-PE

DA-DA189-PE

DA-DA190-PE

DA-DA191-PE

DA-KH180

Available in Specified Destinations

Note:

1. PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.

2. PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.

3. Availability may differ as per destination. Please ask your sales company for details.

■

Supplies

Toner

OPC Drum

Developer

Part Name Part Number Remarks

DQ-TUJ10K-PU For USA and Canada, 10K

DQ-TUJ10K-PK For China, 10K

DQ-TU10J-PB For Other destinations, 10K

DQ-H60J

DQ-Z60J

60K

60K

Note:

Availability may differ as per destination. Please ask your sales company for details.

39

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

1.6.

External View

1. Standard Configuration

Top View

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(For USA Only)

Complies with FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR

Subchapter J

Manufacturer's Name and Address

Factory ID

Left View

For USA, Canada and Europe

21.97 in (558 mm)

Front View

21.54 in (547 mm)

Right View

For Other Destinations

Rear View

Ver. 1.0

40

SEP 2006

2. With Optional System Console Configuration

Top View

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Left View

21.97 in (558 mm)

Front View

24.76 in (629 mm)

Right View

Rear View

Ver. 1.0

41

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

3. Space Requirements With Options

Main Unit

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

16.14 in (410 mm)

Main Unit + ADF

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

Main Unit + i-ADF

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

42

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.6.1.

Serial Number Contents

The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units

(Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation

(Except Letters “I” and “O”)

For Example:

525

52B

= DP-8020P-PU 521 = DP-8020P-PB

= DP-8020E-PU

51Z = DP-8016P-PU

527 = DP-8020E-PB

51V = DP-8016P-PB

Production Facility

Production Year

Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is represented as: A ~ T

A : 01 (2001)

B : 02

C : 03

D : 04

E : 05

F : 06

G : 07

H : 08

I : 09

J : 10 (2010)

K : 11 (2011)

L : 12

M : 13

N : 14

O : 15

P : 16

Q : 17

R : 18

S : 19

T : 20 (2020)

Production Month

A : January

B : February

C : March

D : April

E : May

F : June

G : July

H : August

I : September

J : October

K : November

L : December

43

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

1.7.

Sensors

ADF Sensor 1 (131)

ADF Sensor 2 (131)

ADF Sensor 3 (131)

Home Position Sensor (131)

Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 (131)

Sheet Bypass Sensor 2 (131)

1st Paper Tray Detection

Sensor (131)

2nd Paper Tray Detection

Sensor (131)

2nd Paper Tray Jam Cover

Open Sensor (131)

2nd Paper Tray Paper

Path Sensor (131)

1.8.

Fans and Motors

ADF Motor

(i-ADF: 2601)

(ADF: 1905)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

ADF Original Length Sensor 1 (131)

ADF Original Length Sensor 2 (131)

ADF Cover Open

Sensor (131)

Fuser Unit Sensor (131)

Registration Sensor (131)

Mechanical Counter (821)

1st Paper Tray NP

Sensor (131)

1st Paper Tray Upper

Limit Sensor (131)


Sensor (2806)

2nd Paper Tray NP

Sensor (131)

2nd Paper Tray Upper

Limit Sensor (131)

Scanning Motor (316)

Rear Fan (815)

Drive Motor (1511)

PS Fan (816)

Toner Motor (1503)

Lift DC Motor (3132)

Note:

Numbers in parenthesis "(xxxx)" represent the Part Reference Number(s) found in the Parts Manual for your quick reference.

44

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1.9.

Clutches and Switches

ADF Roller

Clutch (2324)

Intermediate

Clutch (2632)

Feed 2 Roller

Clutch (2325)

Interlock Switch (227)

Registration Roller

Clutch (694)

Paper Feed Roller

Clutch (695)

Intermediate Roller

Clutch (694)

Paper Feed Roller

Clutch (695)

1.10. PC Boards

Heater Switch (814)

Power Switch (818)

ADF PCB

(i-ADF: 2847)

(ADF: 2846)

PNL2 PCB (2905)

Sort Memory Board

SPC PCB (2802)

F-ROM Board (2805)

SSN PCB (2910)

PCL PCB (2807)

WTS PCB (2806)

FXB PCB (2903)

SC PCB (2801)

CST2 PCB (2908)

SNS PCB (2832)

CCD Unit (427)

PNL1 PCB (2904)

PNL3 PCB (2906)

PNL4 PCB (2907)

MJR PCB (2902)

Hardware Key (3505)

RLB PCB (2804)

DC PCB (2803)

HDD (804)

PS PCB (2901)

Note:

Numbers in parenthesis "(xxxx)" represent the Part Reference Number(s) found in the Parts Manual for your quick reference.

45

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

2 Disassembling, Cleaning and Replacement

2.1.

General Disassembly

Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

46

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2.2.

Disassembly Instructions

2.2.1.

Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit

(1) Open the ADF Cover (2126).

(2) Remove 4 Silver Screws (B1).

(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (2201).

(4) Slightly pull the right edge of the ADF Rear

Cover upward.

(5) Release the Latch Hooks.

(6) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (2101).

(7) Lower the ADF Input Tray back in place.

(8) Disconnect the ADF Motor, and Clutch

Harness (2853) from the Clutch.

(9) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).

(10) Remove the ADF Roller (2314) Assembly.


(12) Remove the Clutch (2324).

(13) Remove the Bushing (2321).

(14) Remove the Rear ADF Guide (2311).

47

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(16) Remove the Pin (2327).

(17) Remove the ADF Shaft (2310).

(18) Remove the ADF Roller (2314).


(20) Remove the Pre Feed Roller Shaft (2316).

(21) Remove the Pre Feed Roller (2018).

(22) Remove 1 Silver Screw (B1).

(23) Remove the ADF Front Cover (2210).

Note:

Release 3 Latch Hooks in the direction as shown by each arrow.

(24) Remove 4 Screws (19).

(25) Remove the Upper ADF Guide (2502).

Ver. 1.0

48

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(27) Remove the Torque Limiter Bushing (2510), and Torque Limiter Spring (2511).

Note:

When reinstalling the Torque Limiter Assembly, ensure that the Torque Limiter Spring is placed into the deeper slot of the Separation Roller.

<Cleaning Torque Limiter Bushing, and Torque

Limiter Spring>

Clean the Torque Limiter Bushing, and Torque

Limiter Spring with a soft cloth, saturated with

Water.

(28) Remove the Separation Roller (2509).

<Cleaning Separation Roller>

Clean the Separation Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

(29) Disconnect the Read Point Sensor Harness

(2858), and remove Sensor (131) (Original

Detection Sensor).

(30) Disconnect all Harnesses on the ADF PC

Board.


(32) Remove the i-ADF PC Board (2847).


(34) Remove the ADF Motor (2601).

Ver. 1.0

49

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(36) Remove the Sensor Bracket (2120).


(38) Remove the Motor Bracket (2610), and Gear

Bracket (2602) Assemblies.

Note:

Apply Molykote EM-50L Grease to all Gears, and

Shafts except to the following: E26S35 Drive Gear

(2604), ADF Motor (2601), and the shafts of Drive

Shaft 2 (2615), and Exit 3 Roller (2515).

< Cleaning ADF Roller, Pre-Feed Roller, Drive

Roller, and Feed 2 Roller>

(1) Open the ADF Cover (2126).

(2) Clean the ADF Roller (2314), Pre Feed Roller

(2018), Drive Roller (2706), and the Feed 2

Roller (2517) with a soft cloth, saturated with

Water.

< Cleaning Exit Roller, and Inverting Feed Roller>

(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (2201).

(4) Open the ADF Exit Cover (2429).

(5) Clean the Exit 3 Roller (2515), and the

Inverting Feed Roller (2428) with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

50

SEP 2006

2.2.2.

ADF Unit

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(1) Open the ADF Cover (1902), and release the

ADF Cover Stopper (2013).

(2) Remove the Pad Cover (2023).

(3) Remove the Separation Rubber (2024).


(5) Remove the ADF Cover (1902).

(6) Disconnect the ADF Motor Harness (2848).

(7) Remove the Pick Up Spring (2022).

(8) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G3).

(9) Remove the Clutch (2324).

Ver. 1.0

51

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(10) Remove 2 Bushings (698).

(11) Remove Roller Holder (2026) Assembly.

Note:

When reinstalling, make sure that the Roller

Holder (2026) Assembly is properly placed on the

ADF Unit.

(12) Remove the Paper Feed Shaft Assembly

(2029).

(13) Remove Paper Feed Roller (2001), and D26 D

Gear (2025).

(14) Remove the Pre Feed Roller (2018), Pre Feed

Shaft (2019), and Pre Feed Gear 1, and 2

(2020, and 2021).


(16) Lift cover, and release the Latch Hook then remove the ADF Rear Cover (1701).

Ver. 1.0

52

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Note:

When reinstalling the ADF Rear Cover (1701), make sure to properly route the ADF Harness as illustrated.

(17) Remove 1 Screw (19).

(18) Remove the ADF PC Board Cover (1916).

(19) Release the Clamp from ADF Unit.

Note:

Do not cut the Tie-Wrap. Push the release clip on the side of the clamp to remove it.

(20) Disconnect the ADF Harness (2827) on the ADF

PC Board (CN21).


(22) Remove 2 Angle Plate (1801).

Ver. 1.0

53

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(23) Open the ADF Unit.

(24) Remove 4 Screws (6A).

Caution:

Don’t close the ADF Unit subsequent to this step.

(25) Remove the ADF Unit.

(26) Disconnect 5 Harnesses (2848, 2849, 2850,

2851) on the ADF PC Board. (5 connectors)


(28) Remove the ADF PC Board (2846).

(29) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(30) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (2848, 2850).


(32) Remove the Motor Bracket (1906) Assembly.

Note:

When reassembling the Motor Bracket (1906)

Assembly, follow the step sequence as illustrated.

Ver. 1.0

54

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(34) Remove the ADF Motor (1905).

(35) Remove 2 Drive Belts (1911, 1912).

(36) Remove the S27 Pulley (1910).

(37) Remove the Snap Ring (B9).

(38) Remove the S27 Pulley (1910).

(39) Release the clips, and remove the Switch

(1918).


Note:

Apply Molykote EM-50L Grease to 3 shafts on the

Right Bracket (1914).

55

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Turn the ADF upside down>

(41) Detach the Hook, and Loop Fastener on the left side of the Scanning Pad (1822).

(42) Remove 1 Screw (19).

(43) Remove the Exit 1 Roller (1812), and P6L8

Bushing (1813).

<Return the ADF to its upright position>

(44) Release 2 Latch Hooks.

(45) Remove the ADF Front Cover (1702).

(46) Release the Harnesses (2849, 2851) from the

Clamp.


(48) Remove the Original Tray.

(49) Remove the Timing Actuator (2004).

Ver. 1.0

56

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(50) Remove the Snap Ring (B9).


(52) Remove the Feed Roller (2010).

<Cleaning the Rollers, and Rubber>

(1) Open the ADF Cover.

(2) Release the Stopper.

(3) Clean the Separation Rubber, Feed Roller, Pre

Feed Roller, and Paper Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

<Cleaning the Exit Roller>

(1) Lift the Original Tray.

(2) Clean the Exit Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

57

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Cleaning the Scanner>


(2) Clean the White Guide, Scanning Pad,

Scanning (S) Glass, and Platen (L) Glass with a soft cloth.

Note:

Ensure that the Clear Film as illustrated by A is not damaged.

Ver. 1.0

58

SEP 2006

2.2.3.

Control Panel Unit, Battery

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Replace the Battery>

(1) Remove 1 Screw (Q8).

(2) Remove the Battery Holder (503).

(3) Replace the Battery (504*).

Note:

Ensure that the battery is installed with correct polarity.

(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder (503), and the

Screw (Q8).

!

CAUTION

Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

*

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.

IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN

INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL

SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.

Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.

!

Avertissement

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE AU LITHIUM. REMPLACEZ UNIQUEMENT AVEC LE MÊME TYPE DE PILE

OU UN TYPE ÉQUIVALENT. UNE UTILISATION OU UN REMPLACEMENT IMPROPRE POURRAIT CAUSER

UNE SURCHARGE, UNE RUPTURE OU UNE EXPLOSION RÉSULTANT EN DES BLESSURES OU UN

INCENDIE. DÉBARASSEZ-VOUS DES PILES USÉES EN RESPECTANT LA RÉGLEMENTATION LOCALE SUR

LA MISE AU REBUT DES DÉCHETS SOLIDES.

* Notice: California only:

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

59

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Control Panel>

(5) Open the Left Cover.

(6) Remove 2 Silver Screws (S6).

(7) Remove the Left Scanner Cover (101).

(8) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws (X2).

(9) Remove the Right Scanner Cover (132).

(10) Remove 2 Silver Screws (1027).

(11) Slightly lift the Control Panel Assembly (538).

(12) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN220).

(13) Remove the Control Panel Assembly.

(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC

Board.

(15) Release the Harnesses from 2 Harness

Clamps.

(16) Remove the Harness Protection Cover (518).

Ver. 1.0

60

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(17) Disconnect the Harness on PNL1 PC Board as illustrated.

(18) Remove 2 Screws (X8).

(19) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (2904).


(21) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (2905) as illustrated.


(23) Remove the PNL 3 PC Board (2906) as illustrated.

Ver. 1.0

61

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(24) Remove the LCD Holder (520).

(25) Remove the LCD Module (519).

Ver. 1.0

62

SEP 2006

2.2.4.

Scanner Unit

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(Refer to 2.2.3.)


(3) Remove the Rear Document Plate (107).

(4) Remove the Platen (L) Glass (106).

(5) Holding by the center, slowly move the Lamp

Base Assembly to the center of the Scanner

Base Frame in the direction shown by the arrow.

(6) Release the Harness.

(7) Release the Latch Hook.

(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC

Board (CN1, and CN2).

(9) Remove the Inverter PC Board (416).

Ver. 1.0

63

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(10) Slide the Lamp Base Assembly to the right side as illustrated.

(11) Release the Harness.

Note:

When reinstalling the Harness, confirm that the

Harness is installed as illustrated.

(12) Slide the Lamp Base Assembly to the right side as illustrated.

(13) Remove the Scanning Lamp (410) as illustrated.

(14) Remove 8 Screws (Y2).

(15) Remove the CCD Cover (406).

Ver. 1.0

64

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(17) Remove the CCD Assembly (427).

Note:

Before proceeding, mark the position of the CCD

Assembly as illustrated.

If the CCD Assembly is not reinstalled at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.


(19) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover (102).


(21) Remove the Synchro Belt (318).

Ver. 1.0

65

SEP 2006

(22) Disconnect the Harness.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(24) Remove the Scanning Motor (316).


(26) Remove the Left Document Plate (109).

Note:

When reinstalling the Left Document Plate, ensure the Scanning (S) Glass is in its original position against the key as illustrated.

Ver. 1.0

66

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(27) Clean the White Reference Sheet with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

(28) Clean both Mirror 2 (421) with a soft cloth.

(29) Clean the Mirror 1 (415) with a soft cloth.

Note:

1. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton

Swab.

2. Do not use Isopropyl Alcohol or any other

Alcohol.

Ver. 1.0

67

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2.2.5.

Process Unit

Note:

To avoid Toner spill in the machine, follow the steps below before removing the Process Unit.

1. Press "FUNCTION", and "1 SIDED COPY" keys simultaneously.

2. The LCD shows “Please wait...” for approx. 5 sec. Then it will be ready.


(2) Open the Front Cover.

(3) Remove the Toner Waste Container (1201).

(4) Remove the Toner Bottle.

Caution:

Do Not install the Toner Bottle before installing the Process Unit first. If the Toner Bottle is installed, and turned to the "Locked" position without the Process Unit installed, the Toner will spill inside the machine.

<Cleaning Charge Wire>

Slide the Corona Cleaner in, and out 3, or 4 times slowly, then return the Cleaning Lever Handle to original position.

68

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(5) Remove 1 Screw (Y3).

(6) Remove the Connector Cover (203).

(7) Loosen 1 Screw.


(9) Remove the Process Unit.

Caution:

To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure that the Left Cover is still open before removing the Process Unit out of the machine.

(10) Unhook 2 Springs as illustrated.


Ver. 1.0

69

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(12) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction of the arrow, and remove.

Caution:

Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the

OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare hands.

Caution:

The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the

OPC Drum to direct sunlight, or bright light.

Even if it is a fluorescent lamp, approx.1000 lm/m

2

(1000 lx).

(13) Release 3 Latch Hooks, and remove the

Developer Cover.

(14) Remove the Support Pipe (1338).

<Removing the Old Developer, and Toner>

(15) Hold the Developer Unit as illustrated over a suitable container, and dump the used

Developer, and Toner by rotating the Gear.

(16) Clean the Developer Unit with a soft dry cloth.

70

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(17) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).

(18) Pour the developer evenly into the developer unit by turning the Black Gear as illustrated. Make sure to empty the bottle.

<Removing the Old OPC Drum>

(19) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.

(20) Remove the Roller Spacer (1409).

(21) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the left side where the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was installed.

(22) Remove 1 Screw (X9).

(23) Remove the Charge Corona Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

71

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(24) Remove the Charge Grid (1433).

(25) Remove 2 Charge Covers (1432, and 1438).

(26) Draw out the Cleaning Lever Handle (Green)

(1427).

(27) Remove the Charge Cleaning Base (1439).

(28) Remove the Charge Wire Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

72

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(29) Remove the Pad Base (1441).


(31) Remove the Cleaning Blade (1408).

(32) Remove the Front Cleaning Felt (1410), Rear

Cleaning Felt (1411), and 2 Cleaning Sponges

(1412).

(33) Remove the Splash Prevention Sheet (1415).

Ver. 1.0

73

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2.2.6.

Fuser Unit

CAUTION:

To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean, or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is hot.



(3) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (1006), and the

Front Fuser Cover (1007).

(4) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.


(6) Remove the Fuser Unit.

(7) Release 2 Harnesses from Latch Hooks.

74

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(10) Remove the Upper Fuser Cover Assembly.

<Cleaning Exit 2 Roller>

Clean the Exit 2 Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

(11) Unhook 2 Springs.

Ver. 1.0

75

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(13) Release 2 Harnesses.


(15) Remove the Exit Roller Cover (1101).


(17) Remove the Fuser Roller (1115) Assembly.


(19) Remove the Front Lamp Holder (1123).

(20) Remove the Fuser Lamp (1116).


(22) Remove the Exit Roller Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

76

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(24) Remove the Finger Base (1108) Assembly.

(25) Remove 5 Separators (1109).

<Cleaning Separators>

Clean the Separators with a Dry soft cloth.

(26) Remove the Fuser Roller (1115) Assembly.

(27) Remove the 2 C-Rings (1113).

(28) Remove the E39 Heat Roller Gear (1112).

(29) Remove the 2 Fuser Roller Bushings (1114).

Note:

Exercise care not scratch the surface of the

Fuser Roller when removing, or reinstalling it.

<Cleaning Fuser Roller>

Clean the surface of the Fuser Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

77

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(31) Remove the Thermostat (1120).


(33) Remove the Thermal Fuse (1118).


(35) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1125).

<Cleaning Thermostat>

Clean the surface of the Thermostat only with a

Dry soft cloth.

<Cleaning Thermistor Assembly>

Clean the surface of the Thermistor Assembly only with a Dry soft cloth.

(36) Remove 2 Screws (S6, X8).

(37) Remove the Ground Plate 2 (1024).

(38) Remove the Pressure Roller (1021) Assembly.

(39) Remove the Front Pressure Plate (1019), and the Rear Pressure Plate (1018).

(40) Remove 2 Pressure Roller Bushings (1020).

Note:

Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure Roller when removing, or reinstalling it.

<Cleaning Pressure Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pressure Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

Ver. 1.0

78

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2.2.7.

Drive Unit

2.2.7.1.

Drive Motor, and Toner Bottle Motor


(2) Remove the Rear Cover (220).

(3) Remove 1 Screw (24).

(4) Remove the Fly Wheels (1555).

Note:

When the Ground Spring Kit (1556) is attached, it is removed.

(5) Disconnect the Harnesses on the SPC PC

Board (CN719, CN721, and CN723), and Main

Motor.


Clamps.



(9) Remove the Fan (815) Assembly.

79

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(11) Remove the Main Drive Frame B.

(12) Remove 2 Snap Rings (S9).


Clamps.

(14) Remove 2 Clutches (694, and 695).

(15) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out of the unit.


(17) Remove the Feed Drive Assembly (1541).


(19) Remove the Main Drive Assembly (1540).

Ver. 1.0

80

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(21) Remove the Drive Motor (1511).

(22) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SPC PC

Board.

(23) Release the Harnesses from Harness Clamps.

Note:

When reinstalling the ILS Harness (SPC PC Board

CN708), ensure that it is secured by the Harness

Clamp as illustrated.


(25) Remove 2 Silver Screws (S6).

(26) Remove the Left Scanner Cover (101).


(28) Remove the Right Scanner Cover (132).


(30) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover (102).

81

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(32) Remove the SPC Bracket (926).



(35) Remove the Toner Bottle Motor Unit.


Ver. 1.0

82

SEP 2006

2.2.7.2.

Lift Up Motor, and 3rd Main Motor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(2) Remove the Rear Cover (220).


(4) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover (3004).







(11) Remove the 3rd Main Motor (3134).


Clamps.

(13) Disconnect the Harness on the SPC PC Board

(CN706).


(15) Remove the Lift Up Motor (3132).

83

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Clamps.

(17) Disconnect the Harness on the CST2 PC Board

(CN774).




Clamps.


(CN774).



Ver. 1.0

84

SEP 2006

2.2.8.

Left Cover



(3) Remove the ADU.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(5) Remove the Bias Transfer Guide (701).

(6) Remove the E-Ring (J6).

(7) Remove the BTR Ring Spacer (705).

(8) Remove the BTR 27 Gear (706).


(10) Remove the Bias Transfer Roller (711)

Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

85

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(11) Remove 2 Bias Transfer Roller Bushings

(709).

<Cleaning Bias Transfer Roller>

Clean the surface of the Bias Transfer Roller only with a soft dry cloth.

<Cleaning Duplex Feed Rollers>

Clean the surface of the Duplex Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

Ver. 1.0

86

SEP 2006

2.2.9.

Bypass Paper Tray

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



(3) Remove the Duplex Guide (638) Assembly.


(5) Remove the Feed Roller (689) Assembly.




<Cleaning Feed Roller>

Clean the surface of the Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

(9) Remove the Pressure Plate (649).

Ver. 1.0

87

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(11) Remove the Guide (659).

(12) Remove the Separation Roller (658) Assembly.


(14) Remove the Torque Limiter 2 (691).

(15) Remove the Separation Roller (658).


Clean the surface of the Separation Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

Ver. 1.0

88

SEP 2006

2.2.10. Paper Feed Module

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(2) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

(3) Remove the Pickup Roller (619).

<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pickup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.







(8) Remove the One-way Clutch (622).




89

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(10) Slide the 2nd Paper Tray out of the unit.

(11) Open the Jam Access Cover (3015).

(12) Remove 3 Screws (Y3, X8).

(13) Remove the Paper Guide (3022).







(18) Remove the One-way Clutch (622).




90

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(21) Remove the Pickup Roller (619).

<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pickup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

<Cleaning Intermediate Roller>

Clean the surface of the Intermediate Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with Water.

Ver. 1.0

91

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2.2.11. PC Boards, and Power Supply PC Boards

<SC PC Board>

(1) Remove the Rear Cover, and Lower Rear

Cover (Refer to 2.2.7.2.).


(3) Remove the LAN Spring (812).

(4) Remove the Process Unit (Refer to 2.2.5.).



(7) Remove the Front Cover 1 (211).


(9) Remove the Right Cover (216).


(11) Remove the Ground Plate (947).

Ver. 1.0

92

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(12) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC

Board.


(14) Remove the SC PC Board (2801).

<SPC PC Board>

(15) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SPC PC

Board.


Note:

When reinstalling the ILS Harness (SPC PC Board

CN708), ensure that it is secured by the Harness

Clamp as illustrated.

(17) Remove 2 Harness Clamps (3805).


(19) Remove the SPC PC Board (2802).

Ver. 1.0

93

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Power Supply PC Boards>

(20) Remove the Inner Cover (219).


(22) Remove the Right Bracket (803).


(24) Remove the PS Cover (801).

Note:

When reinstalling the PS Cover, ensure that the

PS Cover is installed into the Ground Plate as illustrated.

(25) Disconnect the Fan Harness.


(27) Remove the Fan (816) Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

94

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(28) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the PS PC

Board.



(31) Remove the PS PC Board Assembly.

(32) Remove 3 Screws (Y3), and 3 Screws (X3).

(33) Remove the PS Bracket (802).


(35) Remove the PS PC Board (2901).

Ver. 1.0

95

SEP 2006

2.2.12. LSU Unit

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(1) Remove the PS PC Board Assembly.

(Refer to 2.2.11.)

(2) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.



(5) Remove the LSU Unit (829).

Ver. 1.0

96

SEP 2006

2.2.13. Filter

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.7.).

(2) Remove the Ozone Filter (825).

(3) Remove the Filter Holder (824).

Ver. 1.0

97

SEP 2006

2.3.

Hardware Identification Template

Ref. No.

Part No.

Figure

18

19

24

62

XYN3+F6FJ

XTB3+8J

XYN4+F8

XTB3+6JFJ

XTB4+8J

XYN3+F5

1N

3F

5M

5Y

5Z

6A

B1

B4

C2

E8

F7

G6

XYN3+F4FJ

XUC4

XUC6VM

XTB3+12J

DZPB000007

XTB3+8JFI

DZPB000020

XTW3+10SFJ

XSN4+W10FN

FFPFJ0039

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Screw

Screw

Screw

E-Ring

E-Ring

Screw

Remark

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Silver Screw

Blue Screw

Screw

Screw

Silver Screw

Snap Ring

98

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

Ref. No.

H7

Part No.

FFPFJ0041B

J6

J7

J8

K5

XUC3VM

XUC4VM

XUC7VM

XUC5VM

FFPFJ0043B

DZPA000064

XTB3+12J

XTB3+8GFN

DZPA000086

FFPFJ0033B

XTB3+12JFJ

XTB3+10GFJ

DZPA000089

XYN3+F8FJ

XTB3+20GFJ

XTB3+8JFJ

K9

M2

P2

Q8

S6

X3

X4

X6

S9

W9

X1

X2

Figure

Snap Ring

Thumb Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Snap Ring

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remark

Snap Ring

E-Ring

E-Ring

E-Ring

E-Ring

99

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

X7

X8

X9

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Ref. No.

Part No.

XYN3+F14FJ

XTB3+8GFJ

XTB3+8FFJ

XTW3+8PFJ

XTB3+6FFJ-RP

XTW3+6LFJ

XTB3+32GFJ

XSN3+W10FJ

XTW3+6LFJR

Y7

Y8

Y9

Y10

Y11

XNC3FJ

XTN3+10GFJ

XYN4+F8FJ

XYN4+F6FJ

XSB4+10FN

Figure

Nut

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remark

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

100

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1.

Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals, and consists of machine cleaning, and parts replacement.

It is essential to perform these service activities properly, and at the specified intervals for customer satisfaction.

The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance, and image quality.

- You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.

- After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts, and packaging in accordance with local regulations, and clean the surrounding area.

- Before servicing the equipment, turn the power switches Off, and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves, and wear eye protection.

1 Timing

- Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive

Maintenance Check List (refer to 3.4) in the service manual.

2 Cleaning the Rollers

- Rollers should be cleaned with water, and a soft cloth.

- Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.

3 Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions

CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.

- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful, and avoid clothing from being caught by moving components.

-

While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect the connectors on any PC Board.

- When handling the drum, follow the precautions listed in section 3.3.

- Ensure to use correct screws.

- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity.

- To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.

- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.

101

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4 Laser Handling Precautions

The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing, and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopying operation.

However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:

1. Do not insert any screwdrivers, or other tools that have high reflective properties into the laser's path.

objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)

Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum safety, please follow the above precautions.

Ver. 1.0

102

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.2.

Required Tools

No.

1 Soft Cloth

Tools

2 Isopropyl Alcohol

3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2)

4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2)

5 Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in)

6 Tweezer

3.2.1.

Preventive Maintenance Method

No.

7 Pliers

8 Cotton Swab

9 Brush

10

11

Tools

KS-660 - Conductive Grease

(Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.

URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com

)

Molykote EM-50L Grease

(Available from Dow Corning,

URL: http://www.dowcorning.com

)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Part Description

Memory Data

Auto Document

Feeder (ADF)

Scanner Unit

Transmitter Unit

Mirrors

Inspection Items

Important

Action

Check

Check &

Clean

Check &

Clean

Check &

Clean

Check &

Clean

Check

7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check &

Grease

8 Timing Belts Check &

Clean

Comments

1. Print the RAM DATA for reference, and as a precaution.

2. After completing the task(s), print, and compare the RAM

DATA with the previously printed one.

1. Clean the Rollers, and Separation Rubber with a Wet soft cloth (Water).

Note:

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

1. Clean the Scanning Glass, or White Reference Sheet with

Isopropyl Alcohol when required.

1. Remove any foreign obstacles.

2. Clean the Rollers with a Wet soft cloth (Water).

1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands.

2. Clean any dirt, or fingerprints with a Dry Cotton Swab.

Note:

Do not use any type of Alcohol.

1. Check the Harnesses.

2. Check the Connectors.

3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.

1. Check, and grease the required Gears, and Shafts.

1. Check for belt looseness, or abrasion.

2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.

103

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

3.3.

Preventive Maintenance Points

3 4 5 1 2

i-ADF

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

7

42

37, 39

36, 38, 41

40

27

26

15

13

14

43

27

25

20

22

17

18, 19

23, 24

21

20

17

18, 19

21

20

17

18, 19

21

20

17

18, 19

8 11 9 10 6

12

ADF

DETAIL A

104

16

44

45

SEP 2006

31

28

35

32, 33, 34

29 30

DETAIL A

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

105

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.4.

Preventive Maintenance Check List

The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance.

No.

Mechanical Parts

Ref.

No.

i-ADF Unit

1 ADF Roller

2 Pre Feed Roller

3 Separation Roller

4 Torque Limiter

Bushing

5 Torque Limiter

Spring

ADF Unit

6 Exit 1 Roller

7 White Sheet

2314

2018

2509

2510

2511

1812

1814

8 Feed Roller 2010

9 Pre Feed Roller 2018

10 Separation Rubber 2024

11 Paper Feed Roller 2001

12 Scanning Pad

Scanner Unit

13 Mirror 1

14 Mirror 2

1822

415

421

15 Platen (L) Glass 106

16 Scanning (S) Glass 110

2nd, 3rd & 4th Paper Trays

17 Pickup Roller 619

18 Separation Roller

19 Torque Limiter 1

20 Feed Roller

629

690

623

21 Intermediate Roller 3104

Sheet Bypass

22 Feed Roller 689

23 Separation Roller 658

24 Torque Limiter 2

25 Registration Roller

Bias Transfer Unit

26 Bias Transfer Roller

(BTR)

691

601

711

27 Duplex Feed Roller 735

Process Unit

Developer

28 OPC Drum

-

1403

Cleaning

Cycle

(Sheet)

Method

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

-

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

-

60K

60K

60K

60K

-

60K

60K

60K

-

-

Water

Water

1

Water

1

Water

Water

Water

-

-

-

-

-

Water

Water

-

Water

Water

Water

-

-

-

-

1

1

1

1

Water

1

Water

1

Water

1

Water

1

Dry soft cloth

1

1

1

1

1

Water

1

Dry soft cloth

Water

1

Replacement/Adjustment

Cycle

(Sheet)

Procedure

Ref.

Counter

120K

120K

120K

120K

120K

120K

-

-

-

120K

60K

120K

-

-

120K

120K

120K

120K

-

-

-

-

-

120K

120K

120K

-

60K

60K

Refer to

2.2.1.

Refer to

2.2.2.

Refer to

2.2.4.

Refer to

2.2.10.

Refer to

2.2.9.

Refer to

2.2.8.

Refer to

2.2.5.

F7-08

F7-08

F7-04

F7-12/-13/-

14/-15

F7-11

F7-02

F7-10

F7-06

106

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.


30 Charge Wire

Ref.

No.

29 Charge Corona Case 1444

1443

31 Cleaning Blade 1408

32 Front Cleaning Felt 1410

33 Rear Cleaning Felt 1411

34 Cleaning Sponge 1412

1415 35 Splash Prevention

Sheet

Fuser Unit

36 Fuser Roller 1115

37 Pressure Roller 1021

38 Fuser Roller Bushing 1114

39 Pressure Roller

Bushing

1020

40 Thermistor

Assembly

1125

41 Fuser Lamp

42 Separator

1116

1109

43 Exit 2 Roller 1104

Main Unit

44 Ozone Filter

45 Toner Spill Tray

825

1202

Cleaning

Cycle

(Sheet)

60K

Method

10K

By Customer

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

60K

60K

-

-

60K

-

60K

60K

-

-

-

Water

1

Water

1

-

-

Dry soft cloth

-

Dry soft cloth

Water

1

-

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

60K

120K

240K

120K

240K

120K

240K

120K

-

2.2.6.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Replacement/Adjustment

Cycle

(Sheet)

Procedure

Refer to

2.2.5.

Refer to

Ref.

Counter

F7-07

F7-02

-

60K

-

-

240K

-

Refer to

2.2.13.

F7-02

Note:

1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.

To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic

Counter - 00 (List Print).

3. Cleaning, Replacement, and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended standard paper, and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size, orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print, and/or ambient conditions.

• Total Counter View Mode on the LCD

The Total Counter can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "COPY SIZE", and "PAPER TRAY" keys simultaneously in Standby mode for quick reference.

TOTAL COUNTER

1234

• LCD Display Brightness Adjustment

To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE", or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.


COPY SIZE

: Brighter

107

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.5.

Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter

When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show "Call for P/M", or "Replace The Toner Waste

Container" on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.

3.5.1.

"Call for P/M" (Default: 120K)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3, and 3.4.

2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.

3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM Cycle), and change to the desired value.

4. Press “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.2.

"Call for P/M ADF" (Default: Not Set)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3, and 3.4.

2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.

3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF PM Cycle), and change to the desired value.

4. Press “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.3.

U14 "Replace The Toner Waste Container"

A. Blinking Maintenance, and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and stop operating.

A blinking Maintenance, and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display.

To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press any key

(up to 100 additional copies can be made).

B. Steady Maintenance, and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon reaching the 100 copies, the machine stops, and will not allow further operation until the Toner

Waste Container is replaced.

Replace the Toner Waste Container. (Refer to Section 2.2.5.)

Ver. 1.0

108

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.6.

Lubrication Point List

This information is used for routine Preventive Maintenance (PM) calls to ensure the highest degree of reliability. Inspect the following areas, and lubricate as required. The inspection interval is usually 120K copies, or more, however the interval may be reduced due to environmental conditions.


Ref.

No.

Automatic Duplex Unit

Grease Lubrication Point

Pinch Timing Roller 712

KS-660

Bias Transfer

Bushing

709

Ver. 1.0

109

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.7.

Updating the Firmware

The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware

Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port, and a Crossover Cable.

The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX, or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document

Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit, or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL, or

PS/PCL options.

Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

3.7.1.

Firmware Configuration

A. Hardware Configuration

This machine is controlled by two (2) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board, and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.

SC PC Board

Standard

Configuration

With PCL Option

Configuration

With PS Option

Configuration

PC

CPU

On Board

F-ROM

4 MB

(A)

(1)

Program

4 MB

(B)

(2)

Program

4 MB

(D)

(5)

Program

4 MB

Ethernet Port

PC

USB Port

Slot 1

FRM

PCB

(C) 8MB

(3)

Program

2 MB

(a)

(E) 8MB

(6)

Program

4 MB

(a)

Flash Memory

Card

4 MB or 8 MB

8 MB

(4)

Font

4 MB

(b)

(7)

Font

4 MB

(b)

Slot 2

Not

Used

SPC PC Board

CPU

F-ROM

512 KB

Scanner Control Program

Printer Control Program

B. SC PC Board Firmware

The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. An Optional Expansion 8 MB

Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1.

The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, and the 8 MB of SLOT 1 depends upon the configuration of the Standard, PCL, or PS Options.

(1) Standard

The Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM

Code (A).

(2) For PCL Option

The PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM

Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3), and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the

SLOT 1. The Firmware (3), and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).

When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card.

110

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4

MB card for the PCL Control Program (3), and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4).

(3) For PS Option

The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code

(D). The PS Control Program (6), and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.

Both Firmwares (6), and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).

When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4

MB card for the PS Control Program (6), and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).

C. SPC PC Board Firmware

The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner

Control, and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from the SC PCB.

D. Firmware Updating Ports

Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.

(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)

The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the

Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

(2) USB Port (Alternate)

The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation

Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

(3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate)

The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware

Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB, or

8 MB Flash Memory Card.

To update the SC, SPC, and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard configuration, or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL, or PS/PCL configuration.

3.7.2.

Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)

The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.

The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover

cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.

Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.

The installation password is "workio".

Operating Instructions:

\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Setup:

\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the

CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.

111

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Example:

From:

Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat

Firmware Code File: DP-8016_8020_PU_xxxxxx.exe

To:

Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.

Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the

Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

Parent Firmware File Folder

\ DP-8016_8020_PU_xxxxxx

Sub Firmware File Folder

\ SC_STD \ DP-LL80AxVxxxxx_xx

\ SC_PCL \ DP-LL80BxVxxxxx_xx

\ SC_PS \ DP-LL80DxVxxxxx_xx

\ SPC \ LL80SPCAxVxxxxxx

Transferring Order

1

1

1

2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware

Type.

The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note:

1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware, or changing the type of the firmware.

Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection

Tab" of the Operating Instructions.

2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update.

3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating

through the USB Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.

4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name, or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

3.7.3.

Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.

Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.


\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Setup:

\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

112

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P




Example:

From:



To:



Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.

Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.


Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.



Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File


DP-LL80AxVxxxxx_xx.bin


DP-LL80BxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-LL80CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin

DP-LL80CxVxxxxxb.bin


DP-LL80DxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-LL80ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin

DP-LL80ExVxxxxxb.bin


LL80SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin

Transferring

Order

1

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-1

1-2

1-3

2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.


Note:


2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.


113

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.7.4.

Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)

1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).

2. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning

Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC

Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)

3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.

4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the ON position.

5. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys, and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.

6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).

7. The firmware is copied into the machine.

8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby.

9. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF position.

10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.


12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default.

Note:

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby mode.

Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9

Parameters F9-02-xx.

Caution:

If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.7.8. (Firmware Emergency

Recovery)

3.7.4.1. Creating a Master Firmware Card

A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit






Setup:





Example:

From:



To:


3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card





2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB) into/from the machine.

114

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.

(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.

B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB)




2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB) into the machine.



5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).

6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.

7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.


9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.


11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

3.7.4.2. Erasing the Master Firmware Card




2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.



5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO

START”. Press “STOP”.

7. Press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.


9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.

10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

115

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.7.5.

User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)

If your customer requires User Authentication, and/or Via Fax Server, setup the feature(s) by referring to the

Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).

3.7.6.

Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown

Mode)", continue to step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION", and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.

3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive

Unit, and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.


5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the

Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option installed.)

6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by

SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power

Off.

7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

3.7.7.

Firmware Emergency Recovery

The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local

Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware

Flash Card method (2 Flash Cards required).

Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type first as it only requires 2 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this order: SC, and SPC).

After recovering, if optional PCL, or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update

Tool, or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.

If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:

1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the right side of the unit).

- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool, or create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).

- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.

2. Turn the power On while holding the “ENERGY SAVER” key.

3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the “ENERGY SAVER” key.

- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files automatically.

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port, or Master Firmware Card.


116

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.7.8.

Firmware Version

SC

SPC

:

DP-LLNew A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)

AU : USA/Canada

AB : UK

Destination Code (Copier)

PU : USA/Canada

PB : UK

Division Soft

(When it is divided into (a) and (b))

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

Language Code

A : A-English, C-French & Spanish c : French, German, Italian, Dutch,

Portuguese, Spanish, English & Greek d : French, German, Swedish, Norwegian,

Danish, Finnish, Turkish & English e : French, German, English, Polish,

Hungarian, Czech & Russian j k

: English & Korean

: English & Taiwanese n : English & Chinese

Firmware Type

A : Standard

B, C, D, E : Optional

Model Number

:

LLNew SPC A A Vxxxxx

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

AA: Fixed

SPC

Model Number

Ver. 1.0

117

SEP 2006

3.8.

Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

118

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Note:

1. Print F5/F6

1) Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.

2) Press the "9" key to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).

3) Press the "START" key.

4) Press "3", and "SET" keys.

5) Press "V", or "/\" arrow keys to select "00 F5/F6 PARAMETERS", and press "SET" key.

6) Prints the memory contents of the F5, and F6 modes.

2. Contrast Adjusting


2) Press the "2", and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

3) Set the exposure to the center position.

4) Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.

5) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N: FQ-SJ1011), and compare the density to the chart shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (14).

a. Gray scale “A” should not be visible.

b. Gray scale “2” should be clearly visible.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A

1

.

2

3

Not visible

(Not visible, or hardly visible)

Clearly visible

6) Press the "STOP" key to exit the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

7) Press the “6”, and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).

8) Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).

9) Press the "SET" key to highlight the current value.

10) Enter a new value (up to 3-digits).

Note:

The “RESET” key is used to change to a Negative, or Positive (+/-) value.

(+) : Lighter

(-) : Darker

11) Press the “SET”, and “STOP” keys.

12) Enter F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.

Note:

Repeat Steps (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.

F6-49 : T Mode Image Density (Text)

F6-51 : P Mode Image Density (Photo)

14) Press “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

119

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3. PWM Adjustment

1) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays

(including the bypass tray) to disable them.


3) Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).


5) Press the "1", "8", and "SET" keys sequentially to enter the F8-18 "C18 PRT PWM ADJ. PTN.".

6) Press the "START" key to begin the LSU PWM Pattern Printing.

Sample:

4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in our example.

(-5)

(0)

+2

(+5)

In our sample, 4 patches are visible.

Test Pattern

7) Press the "STOP" key.

8) Press the "6", and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).

9) Select "39 LSU Unit PWM ADJUST".

10) Press "SET" button, and enter the value of the gray patch, as established in Step (6).

4. LSU Adjustment

Refer to 3.9.

120

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.9.

Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side

When installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be performed.

The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory.

If copy image is abnormal, specially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.

3.9.1.

Printer Registration

1. Insert Ledger, or A3 size paper into the 1st tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty, or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.


3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).

4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.

5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.

6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.


<Figure>

Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).

For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.

For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.

5 mm

Top (Lead edge)

Two lines are printed

5 mm 5 mm

Two lines are printed

3.9.2.

LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty, or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.



4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.

5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-14, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.

6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.

7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray.


121

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.9.3.

LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty, or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.



4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.

5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.

6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.


3.9.4.

100% Read Adjustment

1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.



4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).

5. Check the Image size of the Copy, and the Original as Portrait.

6. Perform the Service Mode F6-00 (Adj 100% Side-Side Read), to adjust for an identical vertical

(side-to-side) size ratio.

7. If the image is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.

8. Perform the Service Mode F6-01 (Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read), to adjust for an identical horizontal

(top-to-bottom) size ratio.



Note:

This is the size adjustment, and do not worry about the positioning.

3.9.5.

Original Registration & CCD Read Adjustments

1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.





6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the platen original registration detection timing.

7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value.

8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (CCD Read Position Adj), to adjust the CCD Read side position.

9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.


122

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.9.6.

ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Adjustment

1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.





6. Perform the Service Mode F6-93 (ADF 100% Image 1-Sided), to adjust for an identical vertical

(side-to-side) magnification for 1-sided scan.



Note:

This is the size adjustment, and do not worry about the positioning.

3.9.7.

ADF Original Read Edge & ADF Main Scan Adjustments

1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.





6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust for the ADF Original Read

Edge detection timing.

7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.

8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Read Main Scan Pos.), to adjust for the ADF horizontal image read start position.

9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.


Ver. 1.0

123

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.9.8.

Double Exposure Lead, and Side Edge Adjustments

Caution:

Confirm that the Scanning Pad is installed, and aligned correctly on the ADF/i-ADF prior to making

any adjustments. (Refer to the ADF/i-ADF Installation Instructions in Sect. 8.11., or 8.12.)

1. Place a Business Card, Driver's License, Insurance Card, etc. (Invoice size, or smaller) on the

Platen Glass as illustrated.

Driver's License

Platen

2. Insert Letter, or A4 size paper into the 1st Paper Tray, or onto the Sheet Bypass, and change the tray settings to the appropriate paper size.

3. Make a copy using the Double Exposure Copy Mode.

4. Check the Copy Image.

a. For a Horizontal Black Line in the Center, adjust the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read

Timing) by following the steps below.

b. For a Vertical Black Line at the Leading Edge, adjust the Service Mode F6-64 (Side Edge Read

Adjust) by following the steps below.

Output of Letter (A4) Paper (not LTR-R)

Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-63

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-64


6. Perform the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing), and F6-64 (Side Edge Read Adjust).

Note:

It is not recommended setting the value higher than "4" as it will increase the Void Area.


8. Repeat the above steps 3 to 7 until the Black Line(s) disappear.

124

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

3.10. Signal Waveform

3.10.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

BTHP

BZ-

BZ+

C1-

C1+

C2-

C2+

C3+

AC(N)

ACSW

ADF2

ADF3

ADF4

AGND

BAT+

BMCNT

C4+

CASET

CCRMT

CPWM

CSB1

CST2

CST3

CST4

CSTOP

CSTOP4

+5v

+5VD

+5VP

+ACT

+ALM

+DAT

+SLP

AC(L)

Signal Name

+12V

+24V

+24VD1

+24VFL

+24VM

+24VOPC

+24VOPF

+3.3V

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Function

+12 VDC Power Supply



+20 / +24 VDC Power Supply




+3.3 VDC Power Supply

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5 VDC Power Supply

ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply

ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply

DATA Lamp LED Power Supply

Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply

AC Power Supply

AC Power Supply

Fuser Relay

2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal

3rd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal

4th Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal

Ground

Lithium Battery

Toner Bottle Motor Control Signal

Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal

Buzzer Signal

Buzzer Signal (+)

Capacitor 1 Negative Connection Pin for Converter

Capacitor 1 Positive Connection Pin for Converter

Capacitor 2 Negative Connection Pin for Converter




Paper Tray Detection Signal (1st Feeder)

Charge Leak Detection Signal

Charge Control DC ON/OFF PWM

Chip Select Signal

2nd Paper Tray Detection Signal

3rd Paper Tray Detection Signal

4th Paper Tray Detection Signal

2nd Paper Feed Module Detection Signal

4th Paper Feed Module Detection Signal

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

125

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

KIN6

KIN7

L1

L2

L5V

LD

JAMDOR2

JAMDOR3

JAMDOR4

KCDET

KCNT

KIN0

KIN1

KIN2

KIN3

KIN4

KIN5

FDPCHK3

FDPCHK4

FSH

GND

GPWM

HFSOL

HPMB

HSYNC

HUMISN

HVAC1

HVAC2

IICSCL

IICSDA

IOUTA

IOUTB

DAA1

DB0

Signal Name

DB1

DB2

DB3

DB4

DB5

DB6

DB7

DDCPWM

E_RDB

ELPCNT

F/R

FDPCHK2

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Function

ADF Motor Current Control Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Development Control DC ON/OFF PWM

Read/Write Execution Control Signal

Discharge Lamp

Direction of Rotation Signal

2nd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal

3rd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal

4th Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal

Transfer Gate Clock

Ground

Grid Control ON/OFF PWM

Temp Humidity Sensor Signal

LCD driver Power Control Signal

Horizontal Synchronous Signal


INV PC Board/Lamp Signal

INV PC Board/Lamp Signal

IIC Transmission Clock

IIC Transmission Signal

Motor Control Signal


2nd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal

3rd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal

4th Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal

Key Counter Option Detection

Key Counter Option

PNL Key Signal (Key Line)








Line Signal

Line Signal

Laser Circuit +5VDC Power Supply

Motor Lock Detection Signal

126

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

LDWTB

LED0

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

LED6

LED7

LED8

LED9

LEDCT0

LEDCT1

LEDCT2

LEDCT3

LEDCT4

LIFT1

LDJAM3

LDJAM4

LDORI

LDPED

LDPHK2

LDPHK3

LDPHK4

LDPSEN

LDRRSEN

LDSSN

LDTF

LDUPL2

LDUPL3

LDUPL4

LDUPLSEN

Signal Name

LDBTHP

LDCST2

LDCST3

LDCSTSEN

LDDUX

LDEN

LDFPCHK2

LDFPCHK3

LDFPCHK4

LDHEX

LDHFPE

LDI-

LDI+

LDJAM2


Function

Toner Bottle HP Sensor Signal

Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage




Laser Control






Laser Diode Control -

Laser Diode Control +


















PNL LED Control Signal















1st Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal

127

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

nAPACHG nAPICR nAREV nASTAMP nASTROAD1 nATT nB4SEN nBDOOR nCCLH1 nCCLH2 nCCLH3 nCST2 nCTCNT nCTON nDADFON nDUPACK nDUPSEN

LIFT2

LIFT4

Signal Name

LIFTM2

LIFTM4

MGND

MRCLH2

MRCLH3

MRCLH4

N.C.

nA3SEN nA5SEN nAA3S nAA3SN nAADL1 nAADL2 nAAPNT nAB1SN nAB2SN nAB4S nAB4SN nACLH1 nACLH2 nACLH3 nACLOCKAD1 nAEJC nAKEEP1 nAKEEP2 nANG nAOAC

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Function

2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal

4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal

2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal

4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal

Ground

2nd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal

3rd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal

4th Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal

No Connection

Sheet Bypass Paper Size Detection Signal

Sheet Bypass Paper Size Detection Signal

Original Width Detection Signal


Original Length Detection Signal

Original Length Detection Signal

Original Detection Signal

Read Point Detection Signal

Duplex Eject Detection Signal



Feed 2 Roller Clutch Control Signal

Paper Feed Roller Clutch Control Signal

Inverting Roller Clutch Control Signal

ADF Motor Control Clock Signal

Original Eject Detection Signal

Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal

Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal

Platen Cover Angle

ADF Cover Open Detection Signal

Release Lever Plate Solenoid Control Signal

Release Lever Plate Solenoid Control Signal

ADF Exit Cover Open Detection Signal

Stamp Control Signal

ADF Motor Control Strobe Signal

Attention Signal

Sheet Bypass B4 Paper Detection Signal

Platen Cover Open Detection Signal

Feed 2 Roller Clutch Control Signal

ADF Roller Clutch Control Signal

Inverting Roller Clutch Control Signal

2nd Paper Tray Detection Signal

Counter Drive Signal

Ring Detection Signal

ADF Option Detection Signal

Duplex Print Acknowledge Signal

ADU Sensor Signal

128

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

nPHYR nPNLRST nPRDY nPRGDWN nPVSYNC nSACK nSADFON nSCNWUP nSLPKY nSREQ nSTAMP nTFSEN nVCNT nVRDY nWAKE nWTBSEN

OP3CLK nLPOW2 nMMCK nMMON nMMRDY nOPDUP nOPT nORI nOUTA nOUTB nPACK nPCHK4 nPEDSEN nPHY1 nPHY2 nPHYCP

Signal Name

nDUREQ nDUXSOL nFLON nFNRDT nFNRDTP nHEXSEN nHFPESEN nHKOF nLEDACT nLEDALM nLEDDAT nLEDSLP nLIFTM3 nLPOW1


Function

Duplex Print Request

ADU Solenoid Control Signal

Inverter Ground

Fan Ready Signal

PS Fan Ready Signal

Paper Exit Sensor Signal

Bypass Feed Sensor Signal

External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal

ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal

ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal

DATA Lamp LED Control Signal

Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal

3rd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal

Power Control

Power Control

Main Motor Clock

Main Motor Rotation Control Signal

Main Motor Ready Signal

Duplex Unit Detection Signal

PNL4 Detection

Home Position Detection Signal



Printer ACK Signal

4th Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal

Sheet Bypass Paper Detection Signal

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

Panel Reset Signal

Printer Ready Signal

F-ROM Rewrite

Print Registration

Scan ACK Signal

ADF Detection Signal

Energy Saver Signal

Energy Saver Key Signal

Scanner Request Signal


Toner Waste Sensor

+24 VDC Power Supply Control Signal

VSYNC Reset Signal

FAX Wake Up Signal

Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Signal

3rd Paper Tray Motor Clock

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

129

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

PS pSENTIM pSPCRST pSPKOT pVREQ

RESETB

RETRACE

RRCLCNT

RS

RSEN

RW_WRB

S/H

SCN0

SCN1

SCN10

SCN11

SCN2

PCHK2

PCHK3

PCHK4 pCMLD

PFCLCNT

PMCK

PMON

PMRDY

PNLRXD

PNLTXD

POWCNTV pPHY1 pPHY2 pPHYCP pPHYR

Signal Name

OP3ENB

OP3FCK

OP3FDIN

OP3FLD

OP3FLT

OP3FOT

OP3RST

OUTA

OUTB

P/S pADATA1A pADATA1B pBDA

PCHK1


Function

Option Feed FIFO Enable

Option Feed FIFO Clock

Option Feed FIFO Input

Option Feed FIFO Load

Option Feed FIFO Latch

Option Feed FIFO Output

Option Feed FIFO Reset



Motor Start/Stop

ADF Motor Control Signal


Print BDA Signal

1st Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal

2nd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal

3rd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal

4th Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal

Line Switching Relay Drive Signal

Paper Feed Clutch Drive Signal

Polygon Motor Clock

Polygon Motor Rotation Signal

Polygon Motor Ready Signal

PNL Reception Data Signal

PNL Transmission Data Signal

Laser Power Control Signal

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

Parallel / Serial Data Input Select Signal

Scanner LSYNC Signal

SPC Reset Signal

Line Dial Tone Signal

Print ACK Request Signal

LCD Driver Reset Signal

Laser Control

Registration Roller Drive Signal

Register Selection Control Signal

Registration Sensor Signal

LCD Control Signal

Sample Hold Signal

PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)





130

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

THERM1

THERM2

TPWM

UPLIMIT

UPLIMIT2

UPLIMIT3

UPLIMIT4

UPLMT2

UPLMT4

V0

V1

V2

V3

V4

VCL

SCN3

SCN4

Signal Name

SCN5

SCN6

SCN8

SCN9

SMCNT

SPCRXD

SPCTXD

SSR

TC

TDREF

TDSEN

TEMPSN

VDD

VOUT

VOUT1

VOUT2

VSS

ZCRS


Function







Toner Motor Control Signal

SPC Reception Data Signal

SPC Transmission Data Signal

Heater Control Signal

Transfer Control Cleaning Output

Toner Density Reference Sensor

Toner Density Sensor Signal


Thermistor Output Signal

Ground

Transfer Control Transfer Output

1st Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

2nd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

3rd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

4th Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

2nd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

4th Paper Tray Paper Level Signal

LCD Driver Supply Voltages





LCD Power Supply


Voltage Converter Input / Output

Graphic Data Output

Graphic Data Output

Ground


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

131

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.2. SC PC Board

CN51

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN51-1

Signal Name Destination

+24V PS PCB

CN11-1

CN51-2 GND PS PCB

CN11-2

CN51-3 +5VP

CN51-4 +5VD

CN51-5 +5v

CN51-6 GND

CN51-7 GND

CN51-8 GND

CN51-9 GND

CN51-10 GND

CN51-11 +3.3V

CN51-12 +3.3V

PS PCB

CN11-7

PS PCB

CN11-8

PS PCB

CN11-9

PS PCB

CN11-10

PS PCB

CN11-3

PS PCB

CN11-4

PS PCB

CN11-5

PS PCB

CN11-6

PS PCB

CN11-11

PS PCB

CN11-12

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

+3.3V


+3.3V


132

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN51-13 nLPOW1

Destination

PS PCB

CN11-13

CN51-14 nLPOW2 PS PCB

CN11-14

CN51-15 nVCNT PS PCB

CN11-15

CN52

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN52-1


+24V PNL1 PCB

CN220-1

CN52-2 GND PNL1 PCB

CN220-2

CN52-3 GND

CN52-4 GND

PNL1 PCB

CN220-3

PNL1 PCB

CN220-4

CN52-5

CN52-6

+5VP

+5v

PNL1 PCB

CN220-5

PNL1 PCB

CN220-6

CN52-7 PNLRXD PNL1 PCB

CN220-7

CN52-8 PNLTXD PNL1 PCB

CN220-8

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Power Control

+24V

0V

+3.3V

Power Control

0V

+24V

0V


Control Signal

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

0V

PNL Reception Data Signal

+5V

0V

PNL Transmission Data

Signal

133

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN52-9


nPNLRST PNL1 PCB

CN220-9

CN52-10 nLPOW2 PNL1 PCB

CN220-10

CN52-11 nLPOW1 PNL1 PCB

CN220-11

CN52-12 nSLPKY PNL1 PCB

CN220-12

CN52-13 nWAKE PNL1 PCB

CN220-13

CN52-16 nVCNT PNL1 PCB

CN220-16

CN53

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN53-1


nPRDY SPC PCB

CN717-1

CN53-2 nVRDY

CN53-3

CN53-4 nPACK nATT

SPC PCB

CN717-2

SPC PCB

CN717-3

SPC PCB

CN717-4

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Panel Reset Signal

RESET

0V

+3.3V

Power Control

0V

+24V

Power Control

0V


+3.3V

PRESSED

0V

+3.3V

FAX Wake Up Signal

0V

+24V

0V


Control Signal

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

Printer Ready Signal

READY

0V

+5V

VSYNC Reset Signal

0V

+5V

Printer ACK Signal

0V

+5V

Attention Signal

0V

134

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN53-5


nDUPACK SPC PCB

CN717-5

CN53-6

CN53-7

CN53-8

CN53-9

CN53-10

CN53-11

CN53-12

CN53-13

CN53-14

CN53-15

CN53-16 pBDA pVREQ nSACK

SPC PCB

CN717-6

SPC PCB

CN717-7

SPC PCB

CN717-8 nPVSYNC SPC PCB nDUREQ pSENTIM nSREQ pSPCRST nPRGDWN

GND

GND

CN717-9

SPC PCB

CN717-10

SPC PCB

CN717-11

SPC PCB

CN717-12

SPC PCB

CN717-13

SPC PCB

CN717-14

SPC PCB

CN717-15

SPC PCB

CN717-16

Signal Waveform

+5V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Duplex Print Acknowledge

Signal

0V

+3.3V

Print BDA Signal

0V

+5V

Print ACK Request Signal

0V

+5V

Scan ACK Signal

0V

+5V

Print Registration

0V

+5V

Duplex Print Request

0V

+5V

Scanner LSYNC Signal

0V

+5V

Scanner Request Signal

0V

+5V

SPC Reset Signal

0V

+5V

F-ROM Rewrite

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

135

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN53-17 IICSCL

Destination

SPC PCB

CN717-17

CN53-18 IICSDA

CN53-19 GND

SPC PCB

CN717-18

SPC PCB

CN717-19

CN53-20 nSCNWUP SPC PCB

CN717-20

CN53-21 SPCRXD SPC PCB

CN717-21

CN53-22 SPCTXD SPC PCB

CN717-22

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

IIC Transmission Clock

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

IIC Transmission Signal

Ground

0V

+5V

Energy Saver Signal

0V

+5V

0V

SPC Reception Data Signal

+5V

0V

SPC Transmission Data

Signal

CN55

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN55-1


VOUT2 CCD

CN850-1

CN55-2 AGND

CN55-3 VOUT1

CN55-4 AGND

CN55-5 AGND

CCD

CN850-2

CCD

CN850-3

CCD

CN850-4

CCD

CN850-5

Signal Waveform

4 6V

1V

0V

Function

Graphic Data Output

Ground

0V

4 6V

Graphic Data Output

1V

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

136

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN55-6


AGND CCD

CN850-6

CN55-7 +12V CCD

CN850-7

CN55-8 AGND CCD

CN850-8

CN55-9

CN55-10

GND

GND

CCD

CN850-9

CCD

CN850-10

CN55-11 pPHYCP CCD

CN850-11

CN55-12 nPHYCP CCD

CN850-12

CN55-13 pPHYR CCD

CN850-13

CN55-14 nPHYR CCD

CN850-14

CN55-15 pPHY2

CN55-16 nPHY2

CN55-17 pPHY1

CCD

CN850-15

CCD

CN850-16

CCD

CN850-17

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

137

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Ground

0V

+12V


Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

CCD CLOCK

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN55-18 nPHY1

Destination

CCD

CN850-18

CN55-19 FSH

CN55-20 +5v

CCD

CN850-19

CCD

CN850-20

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

CCD CLOCK

Transfer Gate Clock

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN57

SC PCB

Pin No.

CN57-1


+3.3V

LSU

CN2-1

CN57-2 GND

CN57-3 LDI+

LSU

CN2-2

LSU

CN2-3

CN57-4 LDILSU

CN2-4

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

Function


0V

Ground

Laser Diode Control +

Laser Diode Control -

Ver. 1.0

138

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.3. SPC PC Board

CN650

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN650-1 +5VP

Destination

ADF PCB

CN21-1

CN650-2

CN650-3

MGND

GND

ADF PCB

CN21-2

ADF PCB

CN21-3

CN650-4 +24V ADF PCB

CN21-4

CN650-5 nAAPNT ADF PCB

CN21-5

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

+5 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

+24V


+5V

DETECT


0V

No Connection CN650-6 N.C.

ADF PCB

CN21-6

CN650-7 nAB4SN ADF PCB

CN21-7

+5V

CN650-8 nAA3SN ADF PCB

CN21-8

CN650-9 nAADL1 ADF PCB

CN21-9

CN650-10 nAADL2 ADF PCB

CN21-10

CN650-11 nAB2SN ADF PCB

CN21-11

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

Original Width Detection

Signal


Signal

0V

Original Length Detection

Signal

0V


Signal

0V

Duplex Eject Detection

Signal

0V

139

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN650-12 nAB1SN

Destination

ADF PCB

CN21-12

CN650-13 nAEJC

CN650-14 nAREV

CN650-15 nAOAC

CN650-16 nAKEEP1

CN650-17 nAKEEP2

CN650-18 nAPACHG

CN650-19 nAPICR

CN650-20 nSTAMP

CN650-21 nACLH1

CN650-22 nACLH2

ADF PCB

CN21-13

ADF PCB

CN21-14

ADF PCB

CN21-15

ADF PCB

CN21-16

ADF PCB

CN21-17

ADF PCB

CN21-18

ADF PCB

CN21-19

ADF PCB

CN21-20

ADF PCB

CN21-21

ADF PCB

CN21-22

+5V

Signal Waveform

0V

+5V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Original Eject Detection

Signal

0V

+5V

ADF Exit Cover Open

Detection Signal

OPEN

0V

+5V

ADF Cover Open Detection

Signal

OPEN

0V

+5V

Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid

Control Signal

0V

+5V


Control Signal

0V

+5V

Release Lever Plate

Solenoid Control Signal

0V

+5V

Release Lever Plate


0V

+5V


0V

+5V

Feed 2 Roller Clutch

Control Signal

0V

+5V

Paper Feed Roller Clutch

Control Signal

0V

140

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN650-23 nACLH3

Destination

ADF PCB

CN21-23

CN650-24 nACLOCKA

D1

ADF PCB

CN21-24

CN650-25 nASTROAD1 ADF PCB

CN21-25

CN650-26 pADATA1A ADF PCB

CN21-26

CN650-27 pADATA1B ADF PCB

CN21-27

CN650-28 +24V

+5V

+5V

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Inverting Roller Clutch

Control Signal

0V

+5V

0V

ADF Motor Control Clock

Signal

ADF Motor Control Strobe

Signal

0V


+5V

0V


+5V

0V

+24V


CN650-29 GND

CN650-30 +24V

CN650-31 GND

CN650-32 DAA1

CN650-33 MGND

CN650-34 MGND

ADF PCB

CN21-28

ADF PCB

CN21-29

ADF PCB

CN21-30

ADF PCB

CN21-31

ADF PCB

CN21-32

ADF PCB

CN21-33

ADF PCB

CN21-34

Ground

0V

+24V


Ground

0V

+5V

ADF Motor Current Control

Signal

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

141

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.


CN650-35 nSADFON ADF PCB

CN21-35

CN650-36 nDADFON ADF PCB

CN21-36

CN650-37 +24V

+5V

Signal Waveform

(For i-ADF)

+0V

(For ADF)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

ADF Detection Signal

ADF Option Detection

Signal

0V

+24V


CN650-38 MGND

CN650-39 +5v

CN650-40 +5v

ADF PCB

CN21-37

ADF PCB

CN21-38

ADF PCB

CN21-39

ADF PCB

CN21-40

0V

+5V

+5V

Ground

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN655

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN655-1 OUTA Scanning Motor

-1

Destination

+18V

0V

Signal Waveform

CN655-3 nOUTA Scanning Motor

-2

+18V

0V

CN655-2 +24V Scanning Motor

-3

Function



+24V


CN655-4 OUTB Motor Control Signal

CN655-5 +24V

Scanning Motor

-4

+18V

0V

Scanning Motor

-5

+24V


142

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN655-6 nOUTB Scanning Motor

-6

Destination

+18V

0V

Signal Waveform

CN656

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN656-1 +24V

Destination

INV PCB

CN1-1

Signal Waveform

+24V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Function


CN656-2 +24V

+24V


CN656-3 nFLON

INV PCB

CN1-2

INV PCB

CN1-3

+24V

CN656-4 MGND

CN656-5 MGND

INV PCB

CN1-4

INV PCB

CN1-5

Inverter Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

CN657

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN657-1 +5VP SNS PCB

-1

Destination Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN657-2 nANG SNS PCB

-2

+5V

Platen Cover Angle

ON

0V

CN657-3 GND SNS PCB

-3

Ground

0V

CN657-4 nBDOOR SNS PCB

-4

+5V

Platen Cover Open

Detection Signal

ON

0V

143

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN657-5 nORI Home Position

Sensor

-1

Destination

CN657-6 GND

CN657-7 LDORI

Home Position

Sensor

-2

Home Position

Sensor

-3

CN701

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN701-1 L5V

Destination

LSU

CN1-1

+5V

Signal Waveform

HOME

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Home Position Detection

Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+1.2V

Photo Sensor DC Drive

Voltage

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

Laser Circuit +5VDC Power

Supply

CN701-2 GND Ground

CN701-3 S/H

LSU

CN1-2

LSU

CN1-3

+5V(H)

0V(L)

0V

Sample Hold Signal

CN701-4 HSYNC

CN701-5 LDEN

LSU

CN1-4

LSU

CN1-5

CN701-6 RETRACE LSU

CN1-6

CN701-7 GND LSU

CN1-7

CN701-8 POWCNTV LSU

CN1-8

+5V(H)

+5V

0V

Horizontal Synchronous

Signal

Laser Control

0V(L)

+5V

Laser Control

0V

Ground

0V

Laser Power Control Signal

+1.1V

144

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN701-9 PMCK

Destination

LSU

CN3-1

CN701-10 PMRDY LSU

CN3-2

CN701-11 PMON

CN701-12 MGND

CN701-13 +24VM

LSU

CN3-3

LSU

CN3-4

LSU

CN3-5

Signal Waveform

+5V(H)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Polygon Motor Clock

+5V

+5V

Ready

ON

0V(L)

Polygon Motor Ready

Signal

0V

Polygon Motor Rotation

Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+24V


CN702

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN702-1 +24VM

Destination

PS PCB

CN500-1

CN702-2 CPWM PS PCB

CN500-2

CN702-3 GPWM PS PCB

CN500-3

CN702-4 N.C.

PS PCB

CN500-4

CN702-5 DDCPWM PS PCB

CN500-5

CN702-6 TPWM PS PCB

CN500-6

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


+5V

Charge Control DC ON/OFF

PWM

0V

+5V

Grid Control ON/OFF PWM

0V

No Connection

+5V

0V

Development Control DC

ON/OFF PWM

+5V

0V

Transfer Control Transfer

Output

145

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN702-7 TC

Destination

PS PCB

CN500-7

CN702-8 CCRMT PS PCB

CN500-8

CN702-9 MGND PS PCB

CN500-9

CN702-10 +24V PS/LSU Fan

-1

CN702-11 nFNRDTP PS/LSU Fan

-2

CN702-12 MGND

CN702-13 +5VP

CN702-14 +5v

CN702-15 +5v

CN702-16 GND

CN702-17 GND

CN702-18 GND

PS/LSU Fan

-3

PS PCB

CN12-1

PS PCB

CN12-2

PS PCB

CN12-3

PS PCB

CN12-4

PS PCB

CN12-5

PS PCB

CN12-6

Signal Waveform

+5V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Transfer Control Cleaning

Output

0V

+5V

Charge Leak Detection

Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+24V


+5V

PS Fan Ready Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

146

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN702-19 ZCRS

Destination

PS PCB

CN12-7

CN702-20 SSR PS PCB

CN12-8

CN702-21 ACSW PS PCB

CN12-9

CN702-22 +24VD1 PS PCB

CN12-10

Signal Waveform

+5V

0V

+5V(H)

0V(L)

ON

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function



+24V

0V

+24V

Fuser Relay


CN703

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN703-1 MGND

Destination

PS PCB

CN10-1

CN703-2 MGND PS PCB

CN10-2

CN703-3 +24V

CN703-4 +24V

PS PCB

CN10-3

PS PCB

CN10-4

Signal Waveform Function

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

+24V


+24V


CN706

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN706-1 +24VM

Destination

1st Tray Lift

Motor

CN706-2 LIFT1

1st Tray Lift

Motor

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


+24V

ON

0V

1st Paper Tray Lift Motor

Signal

147

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CN707

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN707-1 +24VM

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN770-3

CN707-2 MGND CST2 PCB

CN770-4

CN707-3 +5v CST2 PCB

CN770-5

CN707-4 GND

CN707-5 OP3FLT

CST2 PCB

CN770-6

CST2 PCB

CN770-7

CN707-6 OP3RST CST2 PCB

CN770-8

CN707-7 OP3FOT CST2 PCB

CN770-9

CN707-8 OP3FCK CST2 PCB

CN770-10

CN707-9 OP3FLD CST2 PCB

CN770-11

CN707-10 OP3ENB CST2 PCB

CN770-12

CN707-11 OP3CLK CST2 PCB

CN770-13

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

+5V

+5V

0V

+5V (H)

Reset

Ground

0V

+5V


0V


0V

+5V


0V

+5V


0V



0V (L)

+5V

0V

3rd Paper Tray Motor Clock

148

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN707-12 OP3FDIN

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN770-14

CN707-13 ADF2

CN707-14 MRCLH2 CST2 PCB

CN771-2

CN707-15 LIFT2

CN707-16 PCHK2

CN707-17 CST2

CN707-18 UPLIMIT2 CST2 PCB

CN771-6

CN707-21 CSTOP

CN707-23 +24VM

CST2 PCB

CN771-1

CST2 PCB

CN771-3

CST2 PCB

CN771-4

CST2 PCB

CN771-5

CN707-19 FDPCHK2 CST2 PCB

CN771-7

CN707-20 JAMDOR2 CST2 PCB

CN771-8

CST2 PCB

CN771-9

CST2 PCB

CN771-11

+5V

Signal Waveform

+5V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


ON

2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller

Drive Signal

+5V

+5V

+5V(H)

ON

ON

0V

2nd Paper Tray

Intermediate Roller Clutch

Drive Signal

0V

2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor

Signal

0V

+5V


Detection Signal

0V

+5V


Signal

0V

+5V

2nd Paper Tray Paper Level

Signal

0V


Registration Detection

Signal

0V(L)

+5V

2nd Paper Tray Jam Access

Cover Open Detection

Signal

0V

2nd Paper Feed Module

Detection Signal

0V

+24V


149

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN707-24 MGND

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN771-12

CN707-25 +24VM

CN707-26 MGND

CST2 PCB

CN770-15

CST2 PCB

CN770-16

Signal Waveform

Ground

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

0V

+24V


0V

Ground

CN709

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN709-1 PCHK1 No Paper Sensor

-1

Destination

CN709-2 GND No Paper Sensor

-2

CN709-3 LDPSEN No Paper Sensor

-3

CN709-4 UPLIMIT Upper Limit

Sensor

-1

CN709-5 GND Upper Limit

Sensor

-2

CN709-6 LDUPLSEN Upper Limit

Sensor

-3

CN709-7 CASET 1st Tray

Detection Sensor

-1

CN709-8 GND 1st Tray

Detection Sensor

-2


+5V

1st Paper Tray Paper

Detection Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

+5V

1st Paper Tray Paper Level

Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

+5V

Paper Tray Detection Signal

(1st Feeder)

0V

Ground

0V

150

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.


CN709-9 LDCSTSEN 1st Tray

Detection Sensor

-3

CN709-10 RSEN Registration

Roller Sensor

-1

+5V

Signal Waveform

+1.2V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Voltage

Registration Sensor Signal

CN709-11 GND Registration

Roller Sensor

-2

CN709-12 LDRRSEN Registration

Roller Sensor

-3

0V

Ground

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

CN712

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN712-1 LDSSN

Destination

SSN PCB

CN42-1

CN712-2

CN712-3

CN712-4

CN712-5 nA3SEN

GND nB4SEN nA5SEN

SSN PCB

CN42-2

SSN PCB

CN42-3

SSN PCB

CN42-4

SSN PCB

CN42-5

CN712-6 nPEDSEN Bypass Feed No

Paper Sensor

CN712-7 GND

-1

Bypass Feed No

Paper Sensor

-2

Signal Waveform

+1.2V

Function


Voltage

+5V

Sheet Bypass Paper Size

Detection Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

Sheet Bypass B4 Paper

Detection Signal

0V

+5V

Sheet Bypass Paper Size

Detection Signal

0V

+5V

Sheet Bypass Paper

Detection Signal

0V

Ground

0V

151

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN712-8 LDPED

-1

Destination

Bypass Feed No

Paper Sensor

-3

CN712-9 nDUPSEN Duplex Sensor

CN712-10 GND

CN712-11 LDDUX

Duplex Sensor

-2

Duplex Sensor

-3

CN712-14 nHFPESEN Bypass Feed

Sensor

-1

CN712-15 GND

CN712-16 LDHFPE

Bypass Feed

Sensor

-2

Bypass Feed

Sensor

-3

CN715

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN715-1 +24VM

Destination

Registration

Roller Clutch

-1

CN715-2 RRCLCNT Registration

Roller Clutch

-2

CN715-3 +24VM Paper Feed

Clutch

-1

CN715-4 PFCLCNT Paper Feed

Clutch

-2

Signal Waveform

+1.2V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Voltage

Signal Waveform

+24V

ON

Registration Roller Drive

Signal

0V

+24V


+24V

+5V

ADU Sensor Signal

0V

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

+5V

0V

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

+24V

ON

0V

Ground

Bypass Feed Sensor Signal

Ground

Function


Paper Feed Clutch Drive

Signal

152

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN715-5 +24VM Bypass Feed

Solenoid

-1

Destination

CN715-6 HFSOL Bypass Feed

Solenoid

-2

CN717

Refer to SC PC Board .

CN719

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN719-1 +24VM

Destination

Duplex Solenoid

Signal Waveform

+24V

ON

+24V

Signal Waveform

0V

+24V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Temp Humidity Sensor

Signal

Function


CN719-2 nDUXSOL

Duplex Solenoid

+24V

ON

0V

ADU Solenoid Control

Signal

CN720

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN720-3 +24VM PCL PCB

-1

Destination

CN720-4 ELPCNT PCL PCB

-2

CN720-5

CN720-6

+24VM

TDREF

CN720-7 TDSEN

Toner Density

Sensor

-2

Toner Density

Sensor

-1

Toner Density

Sensor

-3

Signal Waveform

ON

+24V

+24V

0V

+24V

9V

4V

5V

0V

Discharge Lamp


Toner Density Reference

Sensor

Toner Density Sensor

Signal

Function


153

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN720-8 GND Toner Density

Sensor

-4

Destination

CN720-12 GND Waste Toner

Sensor

-1

CN720-13 nWTBSEN Waste Toner

Sensor

-2

CN720-14 nTFSEN

CN720-15 LDWTB

CN720-16 LDTF

CN720-17 +5v

Waste Toner

Sensor

-3

Waste Toner

Sensor

-4

Waste Toner

Sensor

-5

Humidity Sensor

-1

CN720-18 HUMISN Humidity Sensor

-2

CN720-19 GND Humidity Sensor

-3

CN720-20 TEMPSN Humidity Sensor

-4

CN720-21 +24VM Total Counter

-1

CN720-22 nCTCNT Total Counter

-2

Ver. 1.0

Signal Waveform

Ground

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

0V

Ground

0V

+5V


Detection Sensor Signal

0V

+5V

Toner Waste Sensor

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

+1.5V

0V


Voltage

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

5V

0V


Signal

Ground

0V

5V

0V

+24V


Signal


+24V

Counter Drive Signal

0V

154

SEP 2006

CN721

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN721-1 THERM1 Thermistor

-1

Destination

CN721-2 THERM2 Thermistor

-2

CN721-3 nHEXSEN Paper Exit

Sensor

-1

CN721-4 GND

CN721-5 LDHEX

CN721-10 +24VFL

Paper Exit

Sensor

-2

Paper Exit

Sensor

-3

Exit Fan

-1

CN721-11 nFNRDT Exit Fan

-2

CN721-12 MGND Exit Fan

-3

CN722

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN722-1 +24VM Toner Bottle

Motor

-1

Destination

CN722-2 BMCNT Toner Bottle

Motor

-2

CN722-3 +24VM Toner Motor

-1

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Thermistor Output Signal

5V

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

0V

Paper Exit Sensor Signal

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

+24V

+20 / +24 VDC Power

Supply

+5V

Fan Ready Signal

0V

0V

Ground

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


ON

+24V

0V

+24V

Toner Bottle Motor Control

Signal


155

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN722-4 SMCNT Toner Motor

-2

Destination

CN722-5

CN722-6

CN722-7

BTHP

GND

LDBTHP

Toner Bottle

Home Position

Sensor

-1

Toner Bottle

Home Position

Sensor

-2

Toner Bottle

Home Position

Sensor

-3

CN723

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN723-1 +24VM Main Motor

-1

Destination

+5V

Signal Waveform

ON

+24V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Toner Motor Control Signal

Toner Bottle Position

Sensor Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

Toner Bottle HP Sensor

Signal

0V

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


CN723-2 +24VM

CN723-3 MGND

Main Motor

-2

Main Motor

-3

+24V


CN723-4 MGND

CN723-5 GND

CN723-6 +5v

Main Motor

-4

Main Motor

-5

Main Motor

-6

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN723-7 nMMON Main Motor

-7

+6.5V

0V

Main Motor Rotation Control

Signal

156

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN723-8 nMMCK Main Motor

-8


+6.5V

0V

CN723-9 F/R Main Motor

-9

0V

CN723-10 nMMRDY Main Motor

-10

+5V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Main Motor Clock

Direction of Rotation Signal

Main Motor Ready Signal

CN726

SPC PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN726-1 +24VM

Destination

Key Counter

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


CN726-2 KCNT

Key Counter

CN726-3

CN726-4

CN726-5

GND

KCDET

N.C.

Key Counter

Key Counter

+24V

0V

Key Counter Option

Ground

0V

+5V

DETECT 0V

Key Counter Option

Detection

No Connection

CN726-6 N.C.

No Connection

157

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.4. PNL1 PC Board

CN220


CN223

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN223-1 CSB1

Destination

LCD

CN223-2 RESETB

CN223-3 RS

CN223-4 RW_WRB LCD

CN223-5 E_RDB

CN223-6 DB0

CN223-7 DB1

CN223-8 DB2

CN223-9 DB3

CN223-10 DB4

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

0V

Function

Chip Select Signal

+3.3V

LCD Driver Reset Signal

RESET

0V

+3.3V

Register Selection Control

Signal

0V

LCD Control Signal

Read/Write Execution

Control Signal

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

158

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN223-11 DB5

Destination

LCD

CN223-12 DB6 LCD

CN223-13 DB7 LCD

CN223-14 VDD LCD

CN223-15 VCL

CN223-16 VSS

LCD

LCD

CN223-17 VOUT LCD

CN223-18 C4+

CN223-19 C3+

LCD

LCD

CN223-20 C1-

CN223-21 C1+

CN223-22 C2+

LCD

LCD

LCD

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

Data Signal

Data Signal

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V


+3.3V

LCD Power Supply

Ground

0V

+12.5V

Voltage Converter Input /

Output

+12.5V

Capacitor 4 Positive

Connection Pin for

Converter

+12.5V

+9.5V


Connection Pin for

Converter

+3.3V

0V

Capacitor 1 Negative

Connection Pin for

Converter

+6.3V

+3.3V


Connection Pin for

Converter

+9.5V

+6.3V


Connection Pin for

Converter

159

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN223-23 C2-

CN223-24 V1

CN223-25 V2

Destination

LCD

LCD

LCD

CN223-26 V3

CN223-27 V4

CN223-28 V0

CN223-29 PS

LCD

LCD

LCD

LCD

CN223-30 HPMB LCD

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Capacitor 2 Negative

Connection Pin for

Converter

+6.7V


+5.3V


+2.6V


+1.4V


+8V


+3.3V

Parallel / Serial Data Input

Select Signal

+3.3V

LCD driver Power Control

Signal

CN230

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN230-1 LED0

Destination

PNL2 PCB

CN250-1

CN230-2 KIN7

CN230-3 LED1

PNL2 PCB

CN250-2

PNL2 PCB

CN250-3

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

Function


0V

+3.3V

0V



0V

160

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN230-4 KIN6

Destination

PNL2 PCB

CN250-4

CN230-5 LED2

CN230-6

CN230-7

CN230-8

CN230-9

SCN0

LED3

SCN1

LED4

PNL2 PCB

CN250-5

PNL2 PCB

CN250-6

PNL2 PCB

CN250-7

PNL2 PCB

CN250-8

PNL2 PCB

CN250-9

CN230-10 KIN5

CN230-11 LED5

CN230-12 KIN4

CN230-13 LEDCT2

CN230-14 KIN3

CN230-15 LEDCT3

PNL2 PCB

CN250-10

PNL2 PCB

CN250-11

PNL2 PCB

CN250-12

PNL2 PCB

CN250-13

PNL2 PCB

CN250-14

PNL2 PCB

CN250-15

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

+3.3V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function



Key

Scan

Key

Scan

0V

+3.3V

0V



0V

+3.3V

0V



Key

Pressed

0V

+3.3V

0V



0V

0V

Key

Pressed

LED ON

+3.3V

0V


+5V


0V

Key

Pressed

LED ON

+3.3V

0V


+5V


161

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN230-16 KIN2

Destination

PNL2 PCB

CN250-16

CN230-17 LEDCT4

CN230-18 BAT+

PNL2 PCB

CN250-17

PNL2 PCB

CN250-18

0V

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


+3.3V

0V

+5V


LED ON

+3V

Lithium Battery

CN231

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN231-1 +SLP

Destination

PNL2 PCB

CN251-1

CN231-2 nLEDSLP PNL2 PCB

CN251-2

CN231-3

CN231-4

CN231-5

CN231-6

CN231-7

CN231-8 nSLPKY

GND

LEDCT0

BZ+

LEDCT1

BZ-

PNL2 PCB

CN251-3

PNL2 PCB

CN251-4

PNL2 PCB

CN251-5

PNL2 PCB

CN251-6

PNL2 PCB

CN251-7

PNL2 PCB

CN251-8

0V

0V

Signal Waveform

+5VP

Function

Energy Saver Lamp LED

Power Supply

PUSH

LED ON

+5VP

0V

Energy Saver Lamp LED

Control Signal

+3.3V


0V

Ground

0V

+5V


+12V

(+24V)

Buzzer Signal (+)

+24V: Loud

LED ON

+5V


+12V

(+24V)

0V

Buzzer Signal

+24V: Loud

162

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN231-9 LED6

Destination

PNL2 PCB

CN251-9

CN231-10 SCN2

CN231-11 KIN0

PNL2 PCB

CN251-10

PNL2 PCB

CN251-11

CN231-12 KIN1 PNL2 PCB

CN251-12

CN232

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN232-1 SCN4

Destination

PNL3 PCB

CN252-1

CN232-2 SCN5 PNL3 PCB

CN252-2

CN232-3 SCN3

CN232-4

CN232-5

SCN6

KIN3

PNL3 PCB

CN252-3

PNL3 PCB

CN252-4

PNL3 PCB

CN252-5

CN232-6 N.C.

CN232-7 KIN2

PNL3 PCB

CN252-6

PNL3 PCB

CN252-7

Signal Waveform

Key

Scan

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V




Signal Waveform

Key

Scan

Key

Scan

Key

Scan

Key

Scan

Key

Pressed

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

Function






No Connection

Key

Pressed

+3.3V

0V


163

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN232-8 KIN7

Destination

PNL3 PCB

CN252-8

CN232-9 KIN1

CN232-10 KIN0

PNL3 PCB

CN252-9

PNL3 PCB

CN252-10

CN233

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN233-1 +DAT

Destination

PNL3 PCB

CN253-1

CN233-2 N.C.

CN233-3 +ALM

PNL3 PCB

CN253-2

PNL3 PCB

CN253-3

CN233-4

CN233-5

KIN4

+ACT

PNL3 PCB

CN253-4

PNL3 PCB

CN253-5


CN253-6

CN233-7 nLEDACT PNL3 PCB

CN253-7


CN253-8

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function




Signal Waveform

+24V

0V

Function

DATA Lamp LED Power

Supply

No Connection

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

+24V

0V

ALARM Lamp LED Power

Supply

+3.3V

0V


+24V

0V

ACTIVE Lamp LED Power

Supply


+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

ACTIVE Lamp LED Control

Signal


+3.3V

0V

164

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.


CN233-9 nLEDALM PNL3 PCB

CN253-9

CN233-10 LEDCT0

CN233-11 nLEDDAT

CN233-12 LED9 PNL3 PCB

CN253-12

CN233-13 LEDCT4 PNL3 PCB

CN253-13

CN233-14 LED8 PNL3 PCB

CN253-14

CN233-15 LEDCT3

CN233-16 LED7

CN233-17 LEDCT2

CN233-18 LEDCT1

PNL3 PCB

CN253-10

PNL3 PCB

CN253-11

PNL3 PCB

CN253-15

PNL3 PCB

CN253-16

PNL3 PCB

CN253-17

PNL3 PCB

CN253-18

0V

Signal Waveform

+3.3V

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

ALARM Lamp LED Control

Signal

+5V


LED ON

0V

LED ON

+3.3V

0V

DATA Lamp LED Control

Signal


0V

+5V



0V

+5V


0V

LED ON


0V

+5V


0V

LED ON

+5V


0V

LED ON

CN234

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN234-1

KIN4

Destination

PNL4 PCB

CN280-1

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

+3.3V

0V

Function


165

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN234-2

KIN5

Destination

PNL4 PCB

CN280-2

CN234-3

KIN3 PNL4 PCB

CN280-3

CN234-4

KIN6 PNL4 PCB

CN280-4

CN234-5

KIN2 PNL4 PCB

CN280-5

CN234-6

KIN7 PNL4 PCB

CN280-6

CN234-7

KIN1 PNL4 PCB

CN280-7

CN234-8

SCN11

CN234-9

KIN0

PNL4 PCB

CN280-8

PNL4 PCB

CN280-9

CN234-10 SCN10

CN234-11 SCN8

PNL4 PCB

CN280-10

PNL4 PCB

CN280-11

CN234-12 SCN9

CN234-13 nOPT

PNL4 PCB

CN280-12

PNL4 PCB

CN280-13

Signal Waveform

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Pressed

Key

Scan

Key

Pressed

Key

Scan

Key

Scan

Key

Scan

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V


+3.3V

0V

PNL4 Detection

0V: Detection

166

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

PNL1 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN234-14 GND

Destination

PNL4 PCB

CN280-14

Signal Waveform

0V

Ground

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Ver. 1.0

167

SEP 2006

3.10.5. PS PC Board

CN10

Refer to SPC PC Board .

CN11


CN12


CN500


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

168

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.6. ADF PC Board

CN21


CN22

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN22-1


OUTA ADF Motor

-1

+24V

Signal Waveform

0V

CN22-2 +24V ADF Motor

-2

Function


+24V


CN22-3 IOUTA ADF Motor

-3


CN22-4 OUTB ADF Motor

-4

+24V

0V

+24V

0V


CN22-5 +24V

CN22-6 IOUTB

ADF Motor

-5

ADF Motor

-6

+24V

0V

+24V



CN22-7 +24VOPF

CN22-8 nCCLH2

CN22-9 +24VOPF

CN22-10 nCCLH1

ADF Roller

Clutch

-1

ADF Roller

Clutch

-4

Feed 2 Roller

Clutch

-1

Feed 2 Roller

Clutch

-4

+24V

+24V

+24V


ADF Roller Clutch Control

Signal

ON

0V

+24V


ON

0V

Feed 2 Roller Clutch

Control Signal

169

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CN24

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN24-1

Signal Name

+24VOPF Inverting Roller

Clutch

-1

Destination

CN24-2 nCCLH3 Inverting Roller

Clutch

-4

CN25

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN25-1

Signal Name

+24VOPF

Destination

Stamp Solenoid

Signal Waveform

+24V

+24V

ON

Signal Waveform

0V

+24V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Inverting Roller Clutch

Control Signal

Function


CN25-2 nASTAMP Stamp Solenoid

+24V


ON

0V

CN26

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN26-1


+24VOPC Release Lever

Plate Solenoid

-1

CN26-2 nAPACHG Release Lever

Plate Solenoid

-2

CN26-3

CN26-4

CN26-5 nAKEEP1 Reversing Guide

1 Solenoid

-1

+24VOPC Reversing Guide

1 Solenoid

-2 nAKEEP2 Reversing Guide

1 Solenoid

-3

CN26-6 +24VOPF Duplex 2 Guide

Solenoid

-1

Signal Waveform

+24V

+24V

+24V

ON

ON

ON

+24V

0V

0V

+24V


0V

+24V

Function


Release Lever Plate



Control Signal


Control Signal


170

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN26-7

Signal Name

nAPICR

Solenoid

-2

Destination

Duplex 2 Guide

Signal Waveform

+24V

ON

0V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

Release Lever Plate


CN27

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN27-1


nAAPNT Original

Detection Sensor

-1

CN27-2

CN27-3

GND

+5v

Original

Detection Sensor

-2

Original

Detection Sensor

-3

Signal Waveform

+5V

ON

Function


0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN28

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN28-1


nAADL1 Original Lengh

Sensor 1

-1

CN28-2

CN28-3

CN28-4

GND

+5v nAADL2

Original Lengh

Sensor 1

-2

Original Lengh

Sensor 1

-3

Original Lengh

Sensor 2

-1

CN28-5 GND

CN28-6 +5v

Original Lengh

Sensor 2

-2

Original Lengh

Sensor 2

-3

Signal Waveform

+5V

+5V

ON

ON

Function


Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

0V


Signal

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

171

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN28-7

Signal Name

nAB4S

Destination

SNS PCB

CN41-4

CN28-8 nAA3S

CN28-9 GND

CN28-10 +5v

SNS PCB

CN41-2

SNS PCB

CN41-3

SNS PCB

CN41-1

+5V

Signal Waveform

+5V(H)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


Signal

0V


Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN29

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN29-1

Signal Name

nAB1SN Read Point

Sensor

-1

Destination

CN29-2 GND

CN29-3 +5v

CN29-4 nAOAC

+5V

Read Point

Sensor

-2

Read Point

Sensor

-3

ADF Cover Open

Detection Sensor

-1

+5V

Signal Waveform

CN29-5 GND

CN29-6 +5v

ADF Cover Open

Detection Sensor

-2

ADF Cover Open

Detection Sensor

-3

Function


ON

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

ADF Cover Open Detection

Signal

OPEN

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

172

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

CN30

ADF PCB

Pin No.

CN30-1


nAEJC Eject Sensor

-1

CN30-2 GND

CN30-3 +5v

Eject Sensor

-2

Eject Sensor

-3

0V

Signal Waveform

ON

+5V

Function

Original Eject Detection

Signal

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN30-4 nAB2SN

CN30-5 GND

CN30-6 +5v

CN30-7 nAREV

CN30-8 GND

CN30-9 +5v

Duplex Eject

Sensor

-1

+5V

Duplex Eject

Sensor

-2

Duplex Eject

Sensor

-3

ADF Exit Cover

Sensor

-1

+5V

ADF Exit Cover

Sensor

-2

ADF Exit Cover

Sensor

-3

Duplex Eject Detection

Signal

ON

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

ADF Exit Cover Open

Detection Signal

OPEN

0V

Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

173

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.7. CST2 PC Board

CN770


CN771


CN772

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN772-1 +24VM

Destination

CST3 PCB

CN807-1


CN807-2

CN772-3 +5v CST3 PCB

CN807-3

CN772-4 GND CST3 PCB

CN807-4

CN772-5 OP3RST CST3 PCB

CN807-5

CN772-6 OP3FLT CST3 PCB

CN807-6

CN772-7 OP3FCK CST3 PCB

CN807-7

CN772-8 OP3FOT CST3 PCB

CN807-8

CN772-9 OP3ENB CST3 PCB

CN807-9

CN772-10 OP3FLD CST3 PCB

CN807-10

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


Ground

0V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V


+5V

Reset

0V

+5V


0V


+5V

+5V (H)

+5V

Reset

0V

+5V


0V


0V (L)


0V

174

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN772-11 OP3FDIN

Destination

CST3 PCB

CN807-11

CN772-14 +24VM

CN772-13 GND

CST3 PCB

CN807-13

CST3 PCB

CN807-14

CN773

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN773-1 +24VM

Destination

Paper Feed

Clutch

-1

CN773-2 ADF2 Paper Feed

Clutch

-2

CN773-3 +24VM

CN773-4 MRCLH2

Intermediate

Roller Clutch

-1

Intermediate

Roller Clutch

-2

CN774

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN774-1 +24VM

Destination

2nd Tray Lift

Motor

CN774-2 LIFTM2 2nd Tray Lift

Motor

Signal Waveform

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function


+5V

0V

+24V


0V

Ground

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


ON

+24V

2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller

Drive Signal

0V

+24V


ON

+24V

2nd Paper Tray

Intermediate Roller Clutch

Drive Signal

0V

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


ON

+24V

2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor

Drive Signal

0V

175

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CN775

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name


-1

Destination


-2

CN775-3 LDPHK2 No Paper Sensor

-3

CN775-4

CN775-5

CN775-6

UPLMT2

GND

LDUPL2

Upper Limit

Sensor

-1

Upper Limit

Sensor

-2

Upper Limit

Sensor

-3

CN776

CST2 PCB

Pin No.


CN776-1 FDPCHK2 Registration

Sensor

-1


Sensor

-2

CN776-3 LDFPCHK2 Registration

Sensor

-3

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function


Detection Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

+5V

2nd Paper Tray Paper Level

Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function



Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

176

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

CN777

CST2 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN777-1 nCST2 2nd Tray

Detection Sensor

-1

Destination

CN777-2 GND

CN777-3 LDCST2

2nd Tray

Detection Sensor

-2

2nd Tray

Detection Sensor

-3

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function


Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

CN778

CST2 PCB

Pin No.


CN778-1 JAMDOR2 Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-1

CN778-2 GND Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-2

+5V

Signal Waveform

OPEN

0V

Function

2nd Paper Tray Jam Access


Signal

Ground

0V

CN778-3 LDJAM2 Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-3

+1.2V


Voltage

Ver. 1.0

177

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.8. CST3 PC Board

CN800

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name


-1

Destination


-2

CN800-3 LDPHK3 No Paper Sensor

-3

CN800-4 UPLIMIT3 Upper Limit

Sensor

-1

CN800-5 GND

CN800-6 LDUPL3

Upper Limit

Sensor

-2

Upper Limit

Sensor

-3

CN801

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN801-1 CST3 3rd Tray

Detection Sensor

-1

Destination

CN801-2 GND

CN801-3 LDCST3

3rd Tray

Detection Sensor

-2

3rd Tray

Detection Sensor

-3


+5V

3rd Paper Tray Paper

Detection Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

+5V

3rd Paper Tray Paper Level

Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

3rd Paper Tray Detection

Signal

0V

Ground

0V


Voltage

+1.2V

178

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

CN802

CST3 PCB

Pin No.


CN802-1 JAMDOR3 Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-1

CN802-2 GND

CN802-3 LDJAM3

Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-2

Jam Cover Open

Sensor

-3

CN803

CST3 PCB

Pin No.


CN803-1 FDPCHK3 Registration

Sensor

-1


Sensor

-2

CN803-3 LDFPCHK3 Registration

Sensor

-3

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

3rd Paper Tray Jam Access


Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+1.2V


Voltage

+5V


3rd Paper Tray Paper


Signal

0V

Ground

0V

+1.5V


Voltage

CN804

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN804-1 +24VM

Destination

3rd Tray Lift

Motor

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


CN804-2 nLIFTM3 3rd Tray Lift

Motor

+24V

3rd Paper Tray Lift Motor

Drive Signal

0V

CN805

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN805-1 +24VM 3rd Tray Drive

Motor

-1


+24V

Function


179

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN805-2 MGND 3rd Tray Drive

Motor

-2

Destination

CN805-3 N.C.

CN805-4 P/S

3rd Tray Drive

Motor

-3

3rd Tray Drive

Motor

-4

CN805-5 LD 3rd Tray Drive

Motor

-5

Signal Waveform

0V

Ground

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

No Connection

+5V

Motor Start/Stop

0V

+5V

Motor Lock Detection Signal

0V

CN806

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN806-1 +24VM Paper Feed

Clutch

-1

Destination

CN806-2 ADF3 Paper Feed

Clutch

-2

CN806-3 +24VM

CN806-4 MRCLH3

Intermediate

Roller Clutch

-1

Intermediate

Roller Clutch

-2

+24V

+24V

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


3rd Paper Tray Feed Roller

Drive Signal

0V

+24V


3rd Paper Tray Intermediate

Roller Clutch Drive Signal

0V

CN808

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN808-1 +24VM

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN770-3


CN770-4

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function


Ground

0V

180

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN808-3 +5v

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN770-5

CN808-4 GND

CN808-5 N.C.

CST2 PCB

CN770-6

CST2 PCB

CN770-7

CN808-6 N.C.

CN808-7 N.C.

CST2 PCB

CN770-8

CST2 PCB

CN770-9

CN808-8 N.C.

CN808-9 N.C.

CN808-10 N.C.

CN808-12 N.C.

CN808-13 ADF4

CST2 PCB

CN770-10

CST2 PCB

CN770-11

CST2 PCB

CN770-12

CST2 PCB

CN770-14

CST2 PCB

CN771-1

CN808-14 MRCLH4 CST2 PCB

CN771-2

CN808-15 LIFT4 CST2 PCB

CN771-3

Signal Waveform

+5V

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function

+5 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

No Connection

ON

ON

+24V

4th Paper Tray Feed Roller

Drive Signal

0V

+24V

4th Paper Tray Intermediate

Roller Clutch Drive Signal

0V

+5V

4th Paper Tray Lift Motor

Signal

0V

181

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CST3 PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN808-16 PCHK4

Destination

CST2 PCB

CN771-4

CN808-17 CST4 CST2 PCB

CN771-5

CN808-18 UPLIMIT4 CST2 PCB

CN771-6

CN808-19 FDPCHK4 CST2 PCB

CN771-7

CN808-20 JAMDOR4 CST2 PCB

CN771-8

CN808-21 CSTOP4 CST2 PCB

CN771-9

CN808-23 +24VM

CN808-24 MGND

CST2 PCB

CN771-11

CST2 PCB

CN771-12

CN808-25 N.C.

CN808-26 N.C.

CST2 PCB

CN770-15

CST2 PCB

CN770-16

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


+5V

4th Paper Tray Paper

Detection Signal

0V

+5V

4th Paper Tray Detection

Signal

0V

+5V

4th Paper Tray Paper Level

Signal

0V

+5V

4th Paper Tray Paper


Signal

0V

+5V

4th Paper Tray Jam Access


Signal

0V

4th Paper Feed Module

Detection Signal

0V

+24V


Ground

0V

No Connection

No Connection

182

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3.10.9. FXB PC Board

CN391

FXB PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN391-1 +5VP

Destination

MJR PC Board

CN25-1

Signal Waveform

+5V

Function

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN391-2 GND MJR PC Board

CN25-2

Ground

0V

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply CN391-3 +24V MJR PC Board

CN25-3

CN391-4 pCMLD

CN391-5 nHKOF

CN391-6 nCTON

CN391-7 AGND

MJR PC Board

CN25-4

MJR PC Board

CN25-5

MJR PC Board

CN25-6

MJR PC Board

CN25-7

+5V(H)

OFF

+5V(H)

0V(L)

ON

H: Standby Mode

L: Ringing

0V(L)

Line Switching Relay Drive

Signal

H : CML On

L : CML Off

External Phone Off-Hook

Detection Signal

H : On Hook

L : Off Hook

Ring Detection Signal

Ground

0V

CN392

FXB PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN392-1 L2

Destination

MJR PC Board

CN22-1


Line Signal

CN392-3 L1 MJR PC Board

CN22-2

Line Signal

183

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

CN393

FXB PCB

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN393-1 pSPKOT Speaker

-1

Destination

CN393-2 GND Speaker

-2

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Signal Waveform

(Max)

-1V

(Min)

Function

Line Dial Tone Signal

Ground

0V

Ver. 1.0

184

SEP 2006

3.10.10. MJR PC Board

CN22

Refer to FXB PC Board .

CN25

Refer to FXB PC Board .

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

185

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4 Troubleshooting

4.1.

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart

START

Plug the Power Cord in, and turn the Power Switche ON.

Does the unit power up normally?

Yes

No

Does the LCD display the function correctly?

Yes

No

Troubleshoot Improper

LCD Display

Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed

Does the unit produce normal copies?

Yes

No

Does the original document feed through correctly?

No

Yes

Troubleshoot the

Document Feeder

Does the recording paper exit the unit?

Yes

No

Check for recording paper path problems.

Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes.)

Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems

Ver. 1.0

186

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.2.

Improper LCD Display

START

Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB), and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).

Yes

Is LED/LCD displayed?

No

Does CN52, pin 6 on the SC

PCB measure +5 VDC?

No

Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

Is the trouble resolved?

Yes

END

No

Replace the

Power Supply

Unit.

Yes

Does the display appear normal?

No

Replace the LCD

Module.

END

Note:

LCD Display Brightness Adjustment

To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press, and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE", or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.


COPY SIZE

: Brighter

Ver. 1.0

187

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.

Printed Copy Quality Problems

4.3.1.

Black Copy

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in

Copier F1 Mode, or Fax

Service Mode 3 normal?

Yes

No

Is the OPC Drum/Developer

Unit operational?

Yes

No

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

No

Is the PS normal?

Yes

1. Check all connectors, and voltages

on the PS.

2. Check the contacts between

PS, and Developer Unit.

3. Replace the PS.

No

Is the SPC PCB normal?

Yes

1. Check all connectors, and voltages

on the SPC PCB.

2. Replace the SPC PCB.

END

Ver. 1.0

188

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.2.

Blank Copy

START




Yes

No



Unit operational?

Yes

No


Are there any foreign particles, or stains in the Charge Unit?

No

Yes

1. Clean the Charge Wire

with a soft, dry cloth.

2. Replace the Charge Unit.

No

Is the PS normal?

Yes

1. Check all connectors, and

voltages on the PS.

2. Check the Spring Connector,

and voltage on the PS.

3. Replace the PS.

Are there any foreign particles, or stains blocking the Laser

Beam path?

Yes

No

1. Remove the particles from the

laser beam path, or clean the stains.

2. Replace the LSU.

No

Is the SPC PCB normal?

Yes

1. Check all connectors, and voltages on the SPC PCB.


END

189

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.3.

Vertical White Lines

P

START


Copier F1 Mode normal?

Yes

No


Is the recording paper damp?

No

Yes

Replace the recording paper.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Is the Drum/Developer

Unit operational?

Yes

No

Replace the Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles, or stains blocking the Laser

Beam path?

No

Yes

1. Remove the particles from

the laser beam path, or clean the stains.

2. Replace the LSU.

Are the Fuser, and Pressure

Roller surfaces clean?

Yes

No

Clean, or replace the Rollers.

END

Ver. 1.0

190

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.4.

Ghost Images

A

A

A A A

START




Yes

No



No

Yes



Unit operational?

Yes

No


Are the Fuser and Pressure


Yes

No

Clean, or replace the rollers.

END

Ver. 1.0

191

SEP 2006

4.3.5.

Vertical Dark Lines

P

START




Yes

No



Unit operational?

Yes

No


No

Is the LSU normal?

Yes

Replace the LSU.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



Yes

No


END

Ver. 1.0

192

SEP 2006

4.3.6.

Horizontal Dark Lines

P

START




Yes

No



Unit operational?

Yes

No


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Is the LSU normal?

Yes

Replace the LSU.

No

Is the PS normal?

Yes


voltages on the PS.


and voltage on the PS.

3. Replace the PS.



Yes

No


END

193

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.7.

Dark Background

P

START




Yes

No



No

Yes



Unit operational?

Yes

No


No

Is the LSU normal?

Yes

Replace the LSU.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Is the PS normal?

Yes

No


voltages on the PS.


and voltages on the PS.

3. Replace the PS.



Yes

No


END

194

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.8.

Light Print

START




No

Yes


Yes


No

Replace the paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational?

Yes

No


Are there any foreign particles, or stains blocking the Laser Unit path?

No

Yes

1. Remove the particles from the

laser beam path, or clean the stains.

2. Replace the LSU.

No

Is the PS normal?

Yes


voltages on the PS.

2. Replace the PS.

Are the Fuser, and Pressure Roller surfaces clean?

Yes

No


END

195

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.9.

Horizontal White Lines

P

START




Yes

No



No

Yes



Unit operational?

Yes

No


Are there any foreign particles, or stains in the Charge Unit?

No

Yes

1. Clean the Charge Wire

with a soft, dry cloth.

2. Replace the Charge Unit.

Is the PS normal?

Yes

No

1. Check all connectors, and voltages on the PS.

2. Replace the PS.



Yes

No


END

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

196

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

P

START


No

Yes


Is the Fuser Unit normal?

Yes

No

Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

END

Note:

Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, and/or the Thermistor fail (open-circuit).

Ver. 1.0

197

SEP 2006

4.3.11. Voids in Solid Areas

P

START


No

Yes



Unit operational?

Yes

No




Yes

No


END

4.3.12. Black Dots

P

START


Unit operational?

Yes

No




Yes

No


END

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

198

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases

START


No

Yes


Are there any foreign particles, or stains in the paper path?

No

Yes

Remove any obstructions and / or clean the paper path.

Is the recording paper skewing?

No

Yes

Ensure the paper is set correctly in the Paper Tray, and that the Paper

Guides are properly adjusted.


Roller surfaces soiled, or are there any foreign particles, or stains in the Fuser Unit?

No

Yes

1. Remove any foreign particles

and / or clean the stains.

2. Clean, or replace the rollers.

3. Replace the Fuser Unit.

END

Ver. 1.0

199

SEP 2006

4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode, or Fax


Yes

No


2. Replace the LSU.

3. Replace the PS.

4. Replace the Developer Unit.

Make a local copy.

Is the printed copy correct?

Yes

No

Check the connections of

CN850 on the CCD PCB,

CN 55 on the SC PCB, the Scanning Lamp.

Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit.

Is the received copy correct?

Yes

No

1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB.

2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB.

3. Check the Telephone Line Cord.

4. Replace the FXB PCB.

Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter?

Yes

The transmitting machine may be defective.

No

Telephone line quality is poor.

END

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

200

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.15. Document Skewing

Copy Mode

Sample

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode normal?

Yes

No

Check the Scanner or ADF/iADF mechanism.

Is the LSU normal?

Yes

No

Check or replace LSU.

END

Ver. 1.0

201

SEP 2006

4.3.15.1. LSU Skew Adjustment

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(1) Open the Front Cover, and the Left Cover.

(2) Slide the Process Unit out. (Refer to 2.2.5.)

Caution:



(3) Remove the Front Cover 1. (Refer to 2.2.11.)

(4) Loosen 3 Screws.

< Example of Printed Image >

Document Leading Edge

A

Adjust the Lever Plate downwards, and recheck the

Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.

One scale adjusts the skewed image by approximately 0.15 mm.



A

Adjust the Lever Plate upwards, and recheck the


Ver. 1.0

202

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.16. Abnormal Printing

START

Is the recording paper loaded in the Paper Tray properly?

Yes

No

1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.

2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.

Is the recording paper size, and thickness within specification?

Yes

No

Replace with correct paper.

Is Panasonic Toner being used?

No

Yes

Replace with the Panasonic Toner.

Are all switches, and sensors operating properly?

Yes

No

Adjust, clean, or replace.

Are there any foreign particles, or paper pieces in the receiver unit?

No

Yes

Remove the foreign particles, or paper pieces from the receiver unit.

Do the rollers rotate properly?

Yes

No

1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches, and springs.

2. Adjust, or replace any defective parts.

Is the receiving mechanism operating correctly?

Yes

No

Adjust, or replace any defective parts.

END

203

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems

START

Is the Scanning Lamp abnormal?

No

Yes

Replace the Scanning Lamp.

Are there any foreign particles, or paper pieces in the scanning area?

No

Yes

Remove the foreign particles, or paper pieces from the scanning area.

Is the scanning area dirty?

No

Yes

1. Clean the Scanning Glass.

2. Clean Mirrors 1, and 2.

Yes

Are the Transmitting

Rollers dirty?

No

Clean the rollers.

Is the Scanner Block abnormal?

No

Yes

1. Check CN (SC PCB).

2. Check CN (CCD PCB).

3. Replace the CCD Assembly.

4. Replace the SC PCB.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

END

Ver. 1.0

204

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.3.18. Print Skew Adjustment for Platen Glass Scanning

Follow the procedures below to adjust for the skewing when scanning original(s) from the Platen Glass.

Remove the Platen (L) Glass. (Refer to 2.2.4.)

<Adjustment 1>

When the printed image is skewed as illustrated.



A

(1) Mark the original positions of the Screw A, and B before making any adjustments.

(2) Rotate the Screw A counter-clockwise, and

Screw B clockwise by the same amount.

(Half rotation of the screw, adjusts the skewed image by approximately 0.9 mm.)

Caution:

Do not rotate the screw by more than half a rotation.

(3) Make a copy to confirm the correction.




A

(4) Rotate the Screw A clockwise, and Screw B counter-clockwise by the same amount.

(Half rotation of the screw, adjusts the skewed image by approximately 0.9 mm.)

Caution:

Do not rotate the screw by more than half a rotation.

(5) Make a copy to confirm the correction.

205

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0



A

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Adjustment 2: Alternate method>

It is delicate method as a factory adjustment.

Only when it can not be fixed by the adjustment 1.


(1) Mark the original position of the Plate before making any adjustments.


(3) Adjust the Plate to left, and recheck the




A



(5) Adjust the Plate to right, and recheck the


206

(6) Perform the Service Mode F6-03 to adjust the

Top field, if necessary.

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.4.

Document Feeder (ADF)

4.4.1.

No Document Feed

START

Is the Document set properly?

Yes

Is the Document thickness, or size within specifications?

Yes

No

No

Set the Document properly.

Set the Document on the Platen Glass.

Does the LCD activate when a Doument is set?

No

Yes

Check the Harness of the ADF Motor.

Does the ADF Roller rotate?

Yes

No

Does the NP Sensor

Actuator move smoothly?

No

Yes

Does CN27, pin 3 on the ADF PCB measure +5 VDC?

No

Yes

Adjust, or replace the

Actuator.

Check the connections of CN21 on the ADF

PCB, and CN605 on the SC PCB.

No


Yes

END

Replace the Clutch or the ADF Motor.

Replace the ADF

PCB, or the SC PCB.


Yes

END

No

Replace the ADF PCB.

Is the Feed Roller surface dirty?

Yes

Clean the Feed Roller surface.

No

Check, and adjust the separator pressure.


Yes

No Replace the Pre-Feed and / or the ADF Roller.

END

207

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.4.2.

Document Jam

START

Are there any obstacles in the document path?

Yes

No

No Does the ADF Roller rotate?

Yes

Remove any obstacles blocking the path.

Check the ADF Motor connector.


No

Replace the ADF Motor, or the ADF PCB.

Yes

Does the document feed normally?

Yes

No Check the Gear, and the Roller.

Does CN27, pin 3 on the

ADF PCB measure

+5 VDC?

Yes

No

Check the connections of

CN21 on the ADF PCB and

CN605 on the SC PCB.

Yes


No

Replace the ADF PCB, or

SC PCB.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

END

Ver. 1.0

208

SEP 2006

4.4.3.

Document Skew

START

Are there any obstacles in the document path?

No

Are the Pre-Feed, and ADF

Rollers operational?

Yes

Are the components of the

Feeder Unit operational?

Yes

Does the NP Sensor

Actuator move smoothly?

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Front Page skew?

No

Yes

Back Page skew?

No

END

Remove any obstacles from the document path.

Replace the Pre-Feed, and / or ADF Roller.

Replace any worn out / defective component.

Adjust, or replace the

Actuator.

Adjust Feed Skew

Adjustment "A".

(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)

Adjust Feed Skew

Adjustment "B".

(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

209

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.4.3.1.

ADF Feed Skew Adjustment

Using a lined Original (about 20 lb (75 g/m

2

) weight pager), make a copy from the ADF to check for feeding alignment.

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(1) Copy an Original using the ADF.

(2) Open the ADF Cover, and release the Stopper.

(3) Remove the ADF Front Cover.

Note:

Release the 2 Latch Hooks from back by opening the ADF.

(4) Remove 1 Screw, and turn the Adjusting

Bracket counter-clockwise.

(4)

90

<Example of Printed Image>

Copy Image

Leading Edge

Right

Skewed to the right

(A) If the Document is Skewed to the right, set the

Adjusting Bracket to the right, and secure with 1

Screw.


Copy Image

Leading Edge

Skewed to the left

Left

(B) If the Document is Skewed to the left, set the

Adjusting Bracket to the left, and secure with 1

Screw.

210

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4.4.3.2.

i-ADF Feed Skew Adjustment

Pinch Roller (1838)

(Feed Skew Adjustment "A")

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Pinch Roller (1838)

(Reverse Registration, or Feed Skew Adjustment "B")

1. Front Page Skew Adjustment

Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m

2

) weight pager), make a copy from the ADF / i-ADF to check for feeding alignment.



Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" downwards, and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.

A



A

Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" upwards, and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.

211

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2. Back Page Skew Adjustment (i-ADF Only)

Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m

2

) weight pager), make a copy from the i-ADF to check for feeding alignment.



Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" downwards, and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.

B



Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" upwards, and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.

B

4.4.4.

i-ADF Free Stop Adjustment

Follow the procedure below to adjust the Free Stop function, if necessary.

Screws

Fasten 2 Adjusting Screws on the Right Hinge.

The Adjustment should be performed by 1/4 turn while checking the Free Stop.

Make sure that the rotation values of both Adjusting

Screws are the same.

Ver. 1.0

212

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.5.

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

4.5.1.

Checking Network Configuration

START

Print the current Internet Parameters List

Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation

Information form filled out by the Network

Administrator.

Verify this information with the Internet

Parameters List that you just printed.

Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit?

Yes

Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet

Mask as the unit

From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all

Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unit

Internet Parameters ?

Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Yes

From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: "route print"

Does the current routing table for the

Gateway match ?

Yes

Does the Default Gateway respond to the

"ping IP" command ?

Yes

Does the DNS Server respond to the

"ping IP" command ?

Yes

Does the unit respond to the

"ping host name" command ?

Yes

Does the unit respond to the

"telnet" command ?

Yes

Ask the Network Administrator to verify the

POP/SMTP account, and system status.

No

Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.

No

Ask the Network Administrator to verify the proper information.

No

Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway.

No

Check the power switch, cables , and the current settings of unit.

No

Ask the Network Administrator to check the

Default Gateway, and system status.

No

Ask the Network Administrator to check the

Default Gateway, and system status.

No

Replace the SC PCB

213

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.5.2.

Testing the TCP / IP Network

It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.

In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information, or assistance.

When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call, or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path, and see where the problem is occurring.

In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.

As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).

In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are

Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.

1. System Diagram Model

Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the

Network Administrator.

A description, or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server, and DNS server is required.

Network Configuration

Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com

Network D

PC Client

[210.232.71.18] js2.labo.mgcs.com

SMTP/POP

Server

DNS

Server sv2.labo.mgcs.com

[192.168.1.2]

WAN sv1.labo.mgcs.com

[192.168.1.1]

Network A

[192.168.3.0]

"ping"

PC Client

[192.168.3.4] ec4.labo.mgcs.com

[192.168.3.254]

Router (R1)

[192.168.1.253]

Network B

[192.168.1.0]

PC Client

[192.168.1.4] ec5.labo.mgcs.com

Panasonic Device

[192.168.3.5] ef1.labo.mgcs.com

Network C

[192.168.4.0]

Hub

PC Client

[192.168.4.1] fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com

214

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2. Checking Current Configuration

Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.

Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.

Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit:

Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:

Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)

For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP / Windows Server 2003

The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:

C:\>ipconfig /all

Windows NT IP Configuration

Host Name

DNS Servers

Node Type

NetBIOS Scope ID

: ec4.labo.pcc.com

: 192.168.1.1

:

: Hybrid

IP Routing Enabled.

WINS Proxy Enabled

: No

: No

NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No

Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 :

Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter

Physical Address

DHCP Enabled

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Primary WINS Server

: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8

: No

: 192.168.3.4

: 255.255.255.0

: 192.168.3.254

: 192.168.3.18

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP

Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1, and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com

(obtained from the Host Name).

3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity

The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client

(any DOS, or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address, or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned).

Sample command-line PINGing, and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n, and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.

-n count

: The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.

-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.

215

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

PINGing the Unit

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com

Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253




PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254

Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:





PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com

Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:





If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination, and the following output is displayed:

C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com

Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:

Request timed out.

Request timed out.

Request timed out.

Request timed out.

Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),

Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:

Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

Ver. 1.0

216

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

If the physical destination is far, and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.

e.g.

-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send.

-w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.

C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000

Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:











4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed, and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination.

The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times, and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain

Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.

This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:

a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.

b. To determine whether a router is slow, and needs to be upgraded, or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded.

To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address, or Hostname>

Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com

Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] over a maximum of 30 hops:

1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254

2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

217

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5. Managing Network Route Tables

In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments.

The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:

Network Address

192.168.3.0

192.168.1.0

Netmask

255.255.255.0

255.255.255.0

Gateway

192.168.3.254

192.168.1.253

Interface

192.168.3.254

192.168.1.253

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the

ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.

IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.

Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1.

The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host, and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0, and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop.

When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet, and a message indicating

"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.

Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing, and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below:

• MASK

If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.

• Netmask

If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255.

• Gateway

Specifies the gateway.

• METRIC

Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.

All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.

The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

218

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:

C:\WINDOWS>route print

Active Routes:

Network Address

0.0.0.0

127.0.0.0

192.168.3.0

192.168.3.2

192.168.3.255

224.0.0.0

255.255.255.255

Netmask

0.0.0.0

Gateway Address Interface Metric

192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1

255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1

255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2

127.0.0.1 1

192.168.3.2 1

255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1

255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2

224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2

255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2

127.0.0.1 1

192.168.3.2 1

192.168.3.2 1

192.168.3.2 1

6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly.

This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.

From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:

C:\>nslookup

Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com

Address: 192.168.1.1

NS(Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.

[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]

labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com

[sv1.labo.pcc.com]

labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com

A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

> ls -t A labo.pcc.com

[sv1.labo.pcc.com]

labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

sv1

sv2

A 192.168.1.1

A 192.168.1.2

ec5

ec4

ef1

A 192.168.1.4

A 192.168.3.4

A 192.168.3.5

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

219

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command

TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs, and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.

From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP, and SMTP

Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.

For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu, and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo", and "Block Cursor" radio dials, and click on the OK button.

Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.

Enter "25" in the "Port:" field, and click on Connect button.

For example,

C:\WINDOWS>telnet telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]

220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP80xx V.xx

helo

250 Hello mail from:test

250 Sender OK rcpt to:[email protected]

250 Receipient OK data

354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"

[Press the Enter Key]

Panasonic Internet Fax test test




250 OK, Mail accept quit

221 Closing transaction channel

Ver. 1.0

220

SEP 2006

4.6.

Error Codes (For Copier)

The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.

When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.6.1.

User Error Codes (U Code)

U20

U21

U90

U22

U00

U18

U01

U13 / 14 / 15 / 16 / 25

U07

Note:

Uxx, and a message will appear on the Panel Display.

Code

U00

U01

U07

Item

User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Possible Cause(s)

Key Counter

Close Front Cover

1. Card Key not installed.

2. Key Counter Harness disconnected.

3. Department Code not assigned.

1. Front Cover / Side Cover open.

2. Front Cover / Side Cover Sensor disconnected.

3. Front Cover / Side Cover Sensor defective

4. PS connector disconnected.

5. PS defective.

6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.

7. SPC PCB defective.

Close Tray Cover 1. Tray Cover open.

2. Tray Unit incorrectly installed.

3. Tray Unit connector disconnected.

4. Tray Unit Sensor disconnected.

5. Tray Unit Sensor defective.


7. PS defective.

8. CST2/CST3 PCB connector disconnected.

9. CST2/CST3 PCB defective.

221

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code

U13

U14

U15

U16

U18

U20

U21

U22

U25

U90

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Add Toner

Item

User Error Codes (U Code) Table


1. Toner Bottle incorrectly installed.

2. Low Toner.

3. Toner Sensor disconnected.

4. Toner Sensor defective.



Replace Toner Waste

Container

No Toner Waste Container

1. Toner Waste Container full.

(See Sect. 3.5.3.)

1. Toner Waste Container not installed.

2. Toner Waste Container Sensor disconnected.

3. Toner Waste Container Sensor defective.

No Developer Unit

Total Copy Limit Over

Close ADF Cover

Close ADF

1. Developer Unit not installed.

1. Department Copy Counter full.

1. ADF Cover open.

2. ADF not installed correctly.

3. ADF Cover Sensor disconnected.

4. ADF Cover Sensor defective.


6. PS defective.

1. ADF, and ADF Cover open.

2. ADF Sensor disconnected.

3. ADF Sensor defective.

Close ADF Exit Cover

Shake Toner Bottle

Replace Battery

1. ADF Exit Cover open.

2. ADF not installed correctly.

3. ADF Exit Cover Sensor disconnected.

4. ADF Exit Cover Sensor defective.


6. PS defective.

1. Toner blocked in the Toner Bottle.

1. Internal battery requires replacement.

Ver. 1.0

222

SEP 2006

4.6.2.

Jam Error Codes (J Code)

A

B

C

D2

D3

D4

Section

A

B

C

D2

D3

D4

Jam Location

ADF / i-ADF / Scanner

Paper Transport / Exit Area

Paper Entry Area

2nd Paper Tray

3rd Paper Tray

4th Paper Tray

• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

Original Detection Sensor

Original Length Sensor

Read Point

Sensor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Eject Sensor

Duplex Eject

Sensor

223

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

• Jam Sensor Location of ADF

Read Point, and Eject Sensor

Original Detection Sensor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Original Length Sensor

• Jam Sensor Location of Printer

Paper Exit Sensor

ADU Sensor

Registration Sensor

2nd Paper Tray Path Sensor

3rd Paper Tray Path Sensor

4th Paper Tray Path Sensor

Ver. 1.0

224

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

• Paper Transport / Exit / Entry / Feed Unit Area

Code

Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Contents

J00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)

J01 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Paper Tray)

J02 The 2nd Paper Tray Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Paper Tray)

J03 The 3rd Paper Tray Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Paper Tray)

J04 The 4th Paper Tray Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Paper Tray)

J07 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

2nd Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated. (2nd Paper Tray)

J08 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

3rd Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated. (3rd Paper Tray)

J09 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

4th Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated. (4th Paper Tray)

J12 The 2nd Paper Tray Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated.

J13 The 3rd Paper Tray Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the

Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated.

J14 The 4th Paper Tray Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the

Paper Tray Path Sensor is activated.

J19 The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the ADU

Sensor is activated.

J22 The 2nd Paper Tray Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials.

J23 The 3rd Paper Tray Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials.

J24 The 4th Paper Tray Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials.

J30 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is activated. (Sheet Bypass)

J31 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass)

J32 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the ADU

Sensor is activated. (DP-8020E)

J33 The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.

J45 The Paper Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during non-printing mode.

J46 The Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is activated.

J48 The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

Registration Sensor is activated.

J82 The ADU Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Duplex

Feed Roller starts rotating.

J85 The ADU Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is activated.

J87 The ADU Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.

J90 Abnormal Paper Jam: During printing the Front Door was opened, etc.

J91 A Paper Tray was pulled out while feeding paper.

Section

B

D2

D3

D4

B, D2

D3

D4

B, D2

D3

D4

B

B, D2

D2, D3

D3, D4

B

B, C, D

C

225

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Code Contents

J95 The paper size of a Tray differs from the Machine setting size.

J97 After passing the Registration Sensor (Roller), the Paper does not clear the sensor within a predetermined time period.

J98 No VRDY Signal after a predetermined time has lapsed.

J99 No VSYNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated.

Section

B

• i-ADF / ADF Area

Code


Contents

J70 The Read Point Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the original starts feeding.

J71 The Read Point Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after scanning starts.

J72 The Eject Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Read

Point Sensor is activated.

J73 1. The Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after scanning starts.

2. The Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after the

Read Point Sensor is deactivated.

J76 The Duplex Eject Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after scanning starts.

J78 The Duplex Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after

2-Sided Scanning.

J79 The Read Point Sensor keeps detecting paper in the ADF.

J92 The Read Point Sensor does not detect paper in the ADF.

J93 The paper remained in the ADF.

J94 The ADF does not go off after the predetermined time.

Unexpected Jam timing (i.e. Original is too short, Ledger / A3 size original is fed without being recognized that the length is abnormal for a Fax Transmission, etc.)

Section

A

A

(i-ADF only)

A

Ver. 1.0

226

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.6.3.

Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

Code Function

E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass

Scanning

E1- 20 Laser Unit Horizontal

Synchronization

E1: Optical Unit Error


1. Home Position Sensor connector disconnected.

2. Home Position Sensor defective.

3. Scanner Motor connector disconnected.

4. Scanner Motor defective.

5. Scanning Mechanism defective.



8. PS defective.

1. LSU connector disconnected.

2. LSU defective.



E1- 22 Polygon Motor Synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector disconnected.


3. LSU connector disconnected.

4. Polygon Motor defective.

5. PS defective.


E1- 31 Scanning Lamp

(Does not turn On)

1. INV PCB connector disconnected.

2. INV PCB defective.

3. Scanning Lamp defective.


5. PS defective.

Code Function

E2- 01 Lift Motor Rotation

(1st Paper Tray)

E2- 02

Lift Motor Rotation

(2nd Paper Tray)

E2- 03

Lift Motor Rotation

(3rd Paper Tray)

E2- 04

Lift Motor Rotation

(4th Paper Tray)

E2: Lift DC Motor Error


1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.

2. Level Sensor defective.

3. Lift Mechanism defective.

4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.

5. Lift Motor defective.



8. PS defective.

1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.

2. Level Sensor defective.

3. Lift Mechanism defective.

4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.

5. Lift Motor defective.



8. CST2 PCB connector disconnected.

9. CST2 PCB defective.



12. PS defective.

227

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code Function

E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor

Rotation

E2: Lift DC Motor Error


1. Drive Mechanism defective.

2. Drive Motor connector disconnected.

3. Drive Motor defective.





8. PS defective.



DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

E3: Development System Error

Code Function

E3- 01 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation


E3- 02 Toner Screw Motor Over

Current

1. Toner Bottle Motor connector disconnected.

2. Toner Bottle Motor defective.

3. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism defective.

4. Toner Bottle installed incorrectly.



7. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector disconnected.

8. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor defective.

1. Toner Screw Motor defective.

2. Toner Screw Motor Drive Mechanism defective.


E3- 03 Toner Density Sensor Gain

E3- 10 High Voltage Power Supply leak (1) - Grid Charge Voltage

1. Sensor connector disconnected.

2. Sensor defective.




2. PS defective.



5. Corona Wire is abnormal. (Check for: contamination with foreign particles, broken, not installed in the proper position, or loose tension)

E3- 20 Main Motor Rotation 1. Drive Mechanism defective.

2. Main Motor connector disconnected.

3. Main Motor defective.



6. PS defective.

228

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code Function

E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature

E4- 02 Fuser Paper Jam

E4- 10 Fuser Fan Motor Rotation

E4: Fuser Unit Error


1. Fuser Thermistor dirty.

2. Thermistor position incorrect.

3. Thermistor defective.

4. Thermistor connector disconnected.

5. Fuser Lamp connector disconnected.

6. Fuser Lamp defective.

7. Fuser Thermostat defective.

8. Thermal Fuse defective.



11. Fuser temperature low. (Adjust F6-31)

12. Incorrect SC PCB is installed.

13. Incorrect SPC PCB is installed.

1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.

2. Paper Exit Sensor disconnected.

3. Paper Exit Sensor defective.



1. Fuser Fan connector disconnected.

2. Fuser Fan defective.



5. PS defective.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Code Function

E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication

Abnormal

E5- 17 Scanner Synchronization

E5- 19 Scanner Line Synchronization

E5- 40 Sort Memory Abnormal

E5: System Error




3. SC PCB connector disconnected.

4. SC PCB defective.

E5- 42 Total Counter Connection

E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan

Motor Rotation

1. Sort Memory defective.

2. SC PCB connector disconnected.

3. SC PCB defective.

1. Total Counter connector disconnected.

2. Total Counter defective.



1. Cooling Fan connector disconnected.

2. Cooling Fan defective.



5. PS defective.

Code Function

E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal

E7: Optional Unit Error

Check Points

1. Incorrect Hardware Key installed.

2. Hardware Key defective.

229

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Code Function

E13 No Toner Detection

E13: Out of Toner


1. Out of Toner.

2. Toner Bottle not installed.

3. Toner Bottle not installed correctly.

4. Toner Sensor disconnected.

5. Toner Sensor defective.



4.6.4.

Technician Warning

The following message will be displayed in the event.

LCD Message

HDD OPTION REQURIES

ADDITIONAL SORT MEM

MACHINE ID ERROR


1. Additional Sort memory is not installed.

• DA-SM16 (16 MB)

• DA-SM64 (64 MB)

• DA-SM28 (128 MB)

2. Make sure the SDRM PC Board was installed properly.

1. Incorrect SC PCB is installed.

• SC PCB for DP-8020E

• SC PCB for DP-8020P

• SC PCB for DP-8016P


Ver. 1.0

230

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.7.

Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

301

331

400

061

200

212

Code

012

030

031

401

402

403

404

-

RCV

XMT

RCV

XMT

RCV

XMT

XMT

Mode

RCV

XMT

XMT

COPY

XMT

XMT

RCV

(Polling)

XMT

Phase

Fax Information Codes

Description of Problem

C, D The length of the received document is over 2 m.

B Read Point Sensor does not activate within 4 seconds after the document starts feeding.


Document not set properly.

Defective Read Point Sensor.

C

A

Transmitting document was longer than 2,000 mm (78.7 in).

(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (39.4 in),

600 dpi: 430 mm (16.2 in))

ADF Door is open.

Document may be jammed.

Defective Read Point Sensor.

Cover not firmly closed.

Connectors not firmly connected.

Defective FXB PCB.

C Decoding process did not complete at the end of phase C.

A-E Interface error occurred between the CPU, and modem.

System fault.

Modem defective. (FXB PCB)

Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)

Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)

C 8-minutes timer error.

(Germany only)

B

B

B

B

B

T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for

CFR, or FTT.

Wrong number dialed, and the START button was pushed.

Telephone line disconnected while dialing.

FXB PCB (Modem), or MJR PCB defective.

Receiver defective. (It may only be transmitting CED)

Your machine's ID Number is not programmed.

Possible incompatibility, or incorrect

Password (Password Reception,

Selective Receive).

Mailbox full.

Receiver working in non-CCITT mode only. (Possible incompatibility)

DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for

NSF/DIS.

Transmitter had no polling function.

Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) followed by TCF three times, but the receiver did not respond.

(CFR, or FTT is usually returned)

"POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) not set at the transmitter.

Document to be transmitted not placed at the transmitter.

Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB, etc.)

FXB PCB, or MJR PCB defective.

Receiver disconnects line during first

NSS (or DCS) transmitted.

231

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

414

415

416

417

Mode

XMT

RCV

(Password

Comm.)

XMT

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

(Polling)

G3 RX

RCV

(Polling)

XMT

(Polling)

RCV

RCV

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Phase

B

B

D

D

D

D

B

B, D

B


Description of Problem

Transmitter received FTT after it transmitted TCF at 2400 bps.

Received RTN after communicating at 2400 bps.


Line quality poor. (TCF is damaged due to line noise)



XMT-Password mismatched. RCV-

Password mismatched. Selective

RCV incomplete.

Transmitter received no response after it transmitted post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or received DCN.

Transmitter received RTN after it transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.

Transmitter receives PIN after it transmitted a post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.

Received DCN while waiting for post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.)

Received DCN after transmitting

NSC.

No response within 12 seconds in

NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After transmitting FTT)

No response received after transmitting 3rd NSC.

XMT, RCV password does not match.

Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone number.

Receiver defective. (No paper, paper jamming, etc.)

Receiver ceased receiving because of excessive errors. (Line quality poor)

FXB PCB (Modem), or MJR PCB defective.

Receiver receives data with errors.

(Line quality poor)



Receiver receives data with error due to poor line quality, and receiving operator requests voice contact.



Interface, or line faulty.

Transmitter defective.

Transmitter not ready for polling communication.

Password does not match between transmitter, and receiver.


FXB PCB defective.

B Remote side attempted to receive message from your machine in polling communication.

D Receiver did not detect post command, such as EOP, MPS,

EOM, etc.

C Receiver returned RTN in response to post message.

Password does not match between transmitter, and receiver.

Transmitter defective. (No original, document jam, etc.)

Inform the remote side that your machine does not have the polling transmission feature.


Line quality poor. (RTC signal distorted due to line noise)


Line quality poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)


232

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code

418

420

421

422

Mode

RCV

RCV

RCV

XMT

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Phase Description of Problem

C Receiver transmitted PIN in response to PRI-Q from transmitter. (Transmitting operator requests voice contact)

B


T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.


Line quality poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)


Wrong number dialed.

(Non-facsimile communication)



B

B

Busy Tone was detected after sending NSF Signal.

Content of NSF (or DIS), or NSC

(or DTC) was invalid.

B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS transmitted.

B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal.

Remote station disconnected the line.

Wrong number was dialed.

Incompatible content

Interface is incompatible.

Defective remote station.

427

433

434

436

456

490

494

495

496

501

502

G3

RCV

XMT

RCV

XMT, or

RCV

G3 RX

RCV

457 RELAY XMT

CONF. XMT/

POLL

459 RCV

RCV

RCV

XMT

RCV

XMT

XMT/

RCV(V.34)

XMT/

RCV(V.34)

B CD (response from Modem) did not turn OFF within 180 sec. after receiver detected FLAG signal.

C DCN received after transmitting

FTT.

B Received relay transfer request, or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station, or all confidential mailboxes are used.

B Remote unit does not have

Relayed XMT, or Confidential

Comm. capability.

C Failed training in Phase C.

C Sum of error lines exceeded the limit (Function Parameter No. 70) of 64 lines.

C Interval between two EOLs was more than 10 sec. when receiver received message data.

Remote unit defective.


Transmitter defective, or incompatible.

Line quality poor.

Line quality poor. (Training signal distorted due to line noise)


Line quality poor.



Line quality poor. (EOL damaged due to line noise)


Line disconnected.



C During reception, CD turned OFF, or continued ON for long time.

During communication, lost loop - current.

C CS of modem is not able to turn

ON.

B Incompatible Modem on the

Remote unit.

B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF, or continued ON for long time.

During communication, lost loop - current.

FXB PCB defective.

Line disconnected.



233

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code

503

Mode

XMT/

RCV(V.34)

504 RCV/V.34

(Polling)

505 XMT/V.34

(Polling)

540 XMT ECM

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn

ON during training.

B


B

Polling is rejected from the remote station.

Polling XMT is rejected.


FXB PCB defective.

Line disconnected.

No polling original set.

No polling original set.

541

542

543

544

550

554

555

570

571

580

581

582

601

623

630

631

XMT ECM

XMT ECM

XMT ECM

XMT ECM

RCV ECM

RCV ECM

RCV ECM

RCV

XMT

XMT

XMT

XMT

XMT

XMT

XMT, or

RCV

(Polling)

XMT

B No response after transmitting 3rd

CTC, or DCN received.

D No response after transmitting 3rd

EOR, or received DCN.

D No response to the 3rd RR transmitted, or received DCN.

D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without

MCF.

D Stopped Transmission after EOR

Transmission.

C Timer between frames in phase C has elapsed.

D Transmitted ERR after receiving

EOR.

D Transmitted PIN after receiving

EOR.

B Password, or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication.

B

B

Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function.

Sub-address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit

155) OFF.

B

B

A

Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has their

DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.

Sub-address SEP (for Polling) transmission to a unit that has their

DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.

ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission.

No original was in the ADF. (Builtin dialer engaged)

B Redial count over.

Incompatible interface.

Faulty line.

MJR PCB abnormal.

Remote unit abnormal.

Remote unit abnormal.

Faulty line.

MJR PCB abnormal.

Defective remote station.

Faulty line.

Faulty line, and Operator Call requested by RX side.

Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function.



Operator removed the original from the

ADF after dialing was completed.

Original was not set properly in the ADF.

No dial tone detected. Sensor did not detect dial tone. (Country dependent)

Busy tone is detected. (Country dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed without a signal from the receiver.

A "STOP" key was pressed during

Auto Dialing.

234

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Code

634

638

700

712

714

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

722

725

726

Mode

XMT

XMT

XMT

RCV

XMT

XMT

RCV

XMT

XMT

XMT

XMT

RCV

POP

POP

RCV

XMT

POP

XMT

POP

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



PSTN Redial count over with no response, or busy tone was not detected.

Note:

U.S.A., and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected.

PSTN

LAN

Power turned Off with applicable data in memory, or during communication.


Power switched Off.

Power failure occurred.

PSTN

LAN

Communication terminated by

Operator pressing the "STOP" key.

LAN Unknown email address replied from the Mail Server.

LAN LAN Interface error.

Cannot logon to the LAN.

Mail Server received an incorrect email address. (Dependent on Server's Mail application)

The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable not connected.

An unexpected LAN problem occurred.

LAN

LAN

TCP/IP connection timed out.

Cannot logon to the LAN.

Incorrect IP Address set.

Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP

Address, SMTP Server IP Address.

Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address set.

No email application activated on the

Mail Server.

Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.

Mail Server defective.

LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol transmission.

LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred while receiving printing data. The paper size selected within your application to print is larger than the paper size loaded in the paper tray(s).

LAN Received data via LAN is in a format that is not supported.

Check the document size, and resolution.

Ask originator to resend in a supported size, and resolution.

LAN Failed to obtain the Network

Parameters (such as: IP Address,

Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP

Address, etc.) from the DHCP server.

Ask the originator to resend with a supported file attachment:

* In a TIFF-F format.

* Image data conforming to A4/Letter size.

LAN Unable to connect to the POP

Server.

Incorrect POP Server address set.

POP Server is down.

LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name, or Password set.

DHCP not available.

(Contact the Network Administrator.)

LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address set.

DNS Server is down.

LAN Received an error response from the DNS Server.

Incorrect POP Server address set.

Incorrect SMTP Server address set.

235

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Code

727

728

729

730

Mode

XMT

XMT

XMT

RCV


LAN Received an Error, or No

Response from the Remote

Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT)

LAN


LAN

LAN

Failed to authenticate (SMTP

AUTHENTICATION) when connecting with the SMTP server.

Unable to program the Internet parameters, or the autodialer via

Email from a PC.


Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy, or

Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT.

(Retry is possible)

Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory

Overflow, or No Power.

(Retry is not possible)

SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name, and/or Password are incorrect.

(Contact the Network Administrator.)

Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is set to Valid.

731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed

Transmission Request was received.

741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial

Dial buffer for manual number dialing

(70 stations) is being used.

Deleted the registered station name before dialing with Timer Controlled

Communications, etc.

800 Relay

Comm.

814 Conf. XMT

Conf. Polling

Relay

Comm.

PSTN The machine was requested to relay a document but has no Relay

Hub capability.

PSTN The remote station does not have

Relay XMT nor Confidential

Communication capability.

815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox full.

816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did not match.

825 Conf. RCV

Conf. Polled

870 MEM XMT

Multi-Copy

879 Memory

RCV

PSTN Parameter settings of the remote station are not properly set.

PSTN

LAN

Memory overflow occurred while storing documents into memory.

PSTN Memory overflow occurred during substitute memory reception.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.

880

884

961

962

-

-

RCV

XMT

LAN Memory overflow.

Mail Server sent a reset command while downloading the data to the machine.

-

File Access Error.

File Access Error.

LAN Memory file access error.

PSTN Memory file access error.

LAN Memory file access error.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.

Mail server aborted the download (Busy with other higher priority jobs).

SC PCB defective.

SC PCB defective.

SC PCB defective.

236

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.8.

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)

The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.

Journal Example

************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********

NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC

01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM

-dd

01:55 C8649003C0000

1st digit 13th digit

- PANASONIC MACHINE

****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined

Data

C

D

A

B

E

F

6

7

8

9

4

5

2

3

0

1

Manufacturer

Code

-

Casio

Canon

Sanyo

Sharp

Tamura

Toshiba

NEC

Oki

Hitachi

Xerox

Fujitsu

Matsushita

Mitsubishi

Murata

Ricoh

Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition

237

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2nd Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

3rd Digit

-: Not used/defined

ID (TSI, CSI, CIG)

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received

-

Received


Definition

RTN

-

DCN

-

-

Received

Received

-

-

-

-

Received

-

Received

Received

-

-

Received

Received

-

-

Received

Received

Received

Received

Received

-

-

-

-

Received

Received

Received

Received

Data

6

7

4

5

8

9

A

2

3

0

1

D

E

B

C

F


Definition

Resolution (dpi) Paper Width

A4

S-Fine

400 x 400

300 x 300

-

A4

A4

A4

B4

S-Fine

400 x 400

300 x 300

600 x 600

600 x 600

-

600 x 600

-

S-Fine

400 x 400

300 x 300

B4

B4

B4

A4

B4

-

A3

A3

A3

A3

A3

STOP Button

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

Pressed

238

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

4th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

0

1

D

E

F

B

C

9

A

5th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Scanning Rate

20 ms/line

5 ms/line

10 ms/line

-

40 ms/line

-

-

0 ms/line

20 ms/line

5 ms/line

10 ms/line

-

40 ms/line

-

-

0 ms/line


Definition

Resolution

Std

Std

Std

Std

Std

Std

Std

Std

Fine

Fine

Fine

Fine

Fine

Fine

Fine

Fine

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

C

D

A

B

E

F

Data

0

1

9

Deferred Comm.

-


Definition

Dialing/RCV

Memory/

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Used

Manual

Communication

Manual

Communication

Non-Memory

-

Used

-

Used

-

Used

-

Used

Auto Dialing

Auto Dialing

Auto RCV

Auto RCV

Remote RCV

Remote RCV

Manual

Communication

Manual

Communication

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Non-Memory

Memory

Memory

-

Used

-

Used

-

Used

Auto Dialing

Auto Dialing

Auto RCV

Auto RCV

Remote RCV

Remote RCV

Memory

Memory

Memory

Memory

Memory

Memory

239

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

E

F

C

D

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

7th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Polling

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

Data

6

7

4

5

8

9

A

2

3

0

1

D

E

B

C

F


Definition

XMT/RCV

RCV

RCV

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

XMT

XMT

Selective Comm.

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Sub-Address

Comm.

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes


Definition

Confidential

Comm.

Relayed Comm.

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Turnaround

Polling

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

Password

Comm.

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

240

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

8th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

9th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Advanced

Comm.

-

Report XMT

Check & Call

-

Memory Transfer

-

-

-

-

Report XMT

Check & Call

-

Memory Transfer

-

-

-


Definition

Cover Sheet

XMT

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data

6

7

4

5

8

9

A

2

3

0

1

D

E

B

C

F

Short Protocol

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

-

-

-

-

B

-

D

-

D


Definition

Standard/ Non-

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

Non-Standard

241

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

10th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

0

1

D

E

F

B

C

9

A

11th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Coding

MH

MR

MMR

JBIG

-

-

-

-

MH

MR

MMR

JBIG

-

-

-

-

Data

E

F

C

D

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1


Definition

ECM

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Symbol Rate

(V.34)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2400 sr

-

2800 sr

3000 sr

3200 sr

3429 sr

-

-


Definition

V.34

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

242

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

12th Digit

-: Not used/defined

Data

Modem Speed

E

F

C

D

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

13th Digit

-: Not used/defined

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

TC 7200 bps

TC 9600 bps

12000 bps

14400 bps


Definition

Modem Speed

(V.34)

-

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12000 bps

14400 bps

16800 bps

19200 bps

21600 bps

24000 bps

26400 bps

28800 bps

31200 bps

33600 bps

-


Definition

Data

E

F

C

D

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

243

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.9.

Troubleshooting (For Printer)

4.9.1.

Checking the Basics

This section explains how to solve problems including error messages, or unexpected printing results.

If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:

• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly

• Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct

• Ensure that the Unit is turned On

• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit

• No error message is displayed on the Unit

• Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box

4.9.2.

Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem

Character is not printing in the correct positions, or the characters near the edges of the page are missing.

The font type is incorrect

Possible Solution(s)

• Check, and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer driver to coincide with the application.

• Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.

• Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device requires minimum margins of 1⁄4 inches (5 mm) on all sides.

• Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.

• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select ”

Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer

Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.

• Select 600 dpi resolution.

The character is not smooth.

Fine line print cannot be obtained.

Poor photograph print quality.

Different character, or symbol from the document is printed.

The printer does not print anything, or prints irregular images from the middle of the

1 st

page.

Printing is exceedingly slow.


• Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.

• Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an

Expansion D-RAM Card, or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the

Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select the Spool settings " from the

Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.


Start printing after first page is spooled "

244

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4.9.3.

Error Message Appears on the PC

Error Message

Network Print DLL Error.

Network Port is Busy.

Cannot print because an error is found in the current printer setting.

Possible Solution(s)

• Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/

100Base-TX cable is properly connected.

• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)

• The Panasonic Device may be processing a different print job, please wait, and try again later.

• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting, or Receiving an email.

• Verify, and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the application, and the printer driver settings.

4.9.4.

Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message

Cannot complete print job;

Image memory overflow

Cannot complete print job;

Confirm print condition

Cannot print;

System error

• There may not be enough Sort Memory available in the

Panasonic Device to complete the print job.

Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• The print settings may not be matched for the system.

Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

Ex: Multi-sized printing.

• Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties dialog box.

4.9.5.

System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Possible Solution(s)

Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive, and click “Retry”.

Ver. 1.0

245

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5 Service Modes

5.1.

Service Modes (For Copier)

These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier, and a means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.

5.1.1.

Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service Mode

The service mode is selected when “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys are sequentially pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.

2. To exit the Service Mode

The service mode is reset when the “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.1.2.

Copier Service Mode Functions

Service

Mode

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

Self Test 00 CCD Test

01 LCD/LED Test

Single Copy Test

Continuous Copy Test

Input / Output Status Test

Function Parameters

Adjust Parameters

Electronic Counter

Service Adjustment

Unit Maintenance

Service Modes (For Copier)

Item

02 Page Memory Test

03 Print Test Pattern 1




Function

This test is used for checking the CCD.

This test is used for checking the LCD, and LEDs.

This test is used for checking the Page

Memory.

Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment.

Prints the Slant pattern for setting the

Paper position alignment.

Prints the Grid pattern for setting the


Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex


One sheet is copied when the Start key is pressed.

Multi copies are made when the Start key is pressed.

The functioning of Input / Output items

(selected item numbers) is checked.

Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be changed.

Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be adjusted.

Electronic Counters for Maintenance

Perform pseudo-operation of an item

(selected by code numbers)

Fax Service Mode

Service Alert Tel #

Firmware Version

Print Device Info.

246

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

* * * * * * * * * * - F 5 / F 6 I N F O R M A T I O N L I S T - * * * * * * D A T E M M M - d d - y y y y * * * T I M E 1 2 : 0 1 * * * P . 0 1

F5-00

F5-01

F5-02

F5-03

F5-04

F5-05

F5-06

F5-07

F5-08

F5-09

. . . . .

Frequency desired

. . . . .

LSU startup speed

LSU off timer

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

Fuser lamp control

F5-10 . . . . .

F5-11 . . . . .

F5-12 Printer fan extension

F5-13 . . . . .

F5-14 Paper size (tray1)




F5-18 . . . . .

F5-19 T Corona Current Adj

F5-20 ADF

60Hz

Full

15 Sec.

Auto

5 min

LETTER

LEDGER

LEDGER

LEDGER

No

Auto

F5-50 Auto contrast adj.

F5-51 Dept. Counter (COPY)

F5-52 Dept. Counter (FAX)

F5-53 2-sided auto shift

F5-54 Margin reduction

F5-55 Margin value default

F5-56 Edge value default

F5-57 Book value default

F5-58 U14 Clear

F5-59 Oper.add toner alarm

F5-60 Auto Tray selection

F5-61 TDC Adj.(Dev Cond.)

F5-62 TDC Adj.(Dev Life)

F5-63 U13 clear

F5-64 Dept. Counter (SCAN)

F5-65 Dept. Counter (PRINT)

F5-66 . . . . .

F5-67 . . . . .

F5-68 . . . . .

F5-69 Reduce N in 1 space

F5-70 PM cycle

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

10mm

5mm

20mm

Any Keys

Stop

Yes

Yes

Yes

Any keys

Yes

Yes

No

120k

* * * * * * * * * * - F 5 / F 6 I N F O R M A T I O N L I S T - * * * * * * D A T E M M M - d d - y y y y * * * T I M E 1 2 : 0 1 * * * P . 0 2

F6-00 Adj 100% Read (S/S)

F6-01 Adj 100% Read (L/T)

F6-02 100% Selection

F6-03 Orig. Registration

F6-04 Printer Registration

F6-05 Main Motor Speed

F6-06 Polygon Motor Speed

F6-07 Registration Void

F6-08 Trail Edge Read Tim.

0

F6-09 Trail Edge Prt Tim. -6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

6

F6-10 Side Adjust (Bypass)

F6-11 Side Adjust (Tray 1)




F6-15 . . . . .

F6-16 Side Adjust (ADU)

F6-17 Std Grid Voltage

F6-18 Standard Laser Power

F6-19 Bias Std Voltage

F6-20 . . . . .

F6-21 TDC Gain Voltage

F6-22 . . . . .

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

F6-50 T/P Mode Image Density

F6-51 Photo Image Density

F6-52 . . . . .

F6-53 CCD Read Position

F6-54 Text Mode Contrast

F6-55 T/P Mode Contrast

F6-56 Photo Mode Contrast

F6-57 . . . . .

F6-58 Corona Charger Curr.

F6-59 Trail Edge(Trays)

F6-60 Trail Edge(Bypass)

F6-61 Trail Edge(2-Side)

F6-62 TDC Gain Voltage Adj

F6-63 Lead Edge Read Tim.

F6-64 Side Edge Read Adj.

F6-65 Trans Side1(S-Wide)

F6-66 Trans Side2(S-Wide)

F6-67 ADF Image Density

F6-68 . . . . .

F6-69 Stamp Position Adj.

F6-70 . . . . .

F6-71 ADF Read Scan Pos.

F6-72 Original Lead ADF:S

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

247

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

* * * * * * * * * * - M A C H I N E S E T U P I N F O R M A T I O N - * * * * * * D A T E M M M - d d - y y y y * * * T I M E 1 2 : 0 1 * * * P . 0 1

1.MACHINE INFORMATION

MACHINE NAME

MAC ADDRESS

SERIAL NUMBER

2.FIRMWARE VERSION

SC

SC BOOT

PNL

SPC

FAX MODEM

PDL FONT1

SC2

: DP-8020E

: 080023006FA1

:

: AAT001xxPU

: LL-NEW

:

:

:

:

:

3.MEMORY CAPACITY

PAGE MEMORY

SORT MEMORY

FAX MEMORY

4.OPTION

DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)

2nd PAPER TRAY

3rd PAPER TRAY

4th PAPER TRAY

ADF DUPLEX SCANNING

FAX BOARD

NETWORK SCANNER

PCL PRINTER

PS PRINTER

EMAIL

HDD

KEYBOARD

: 32 MB

: 16 MB

: 2 MB

: ADF

: Yes

: Yes

: Yes

: Yes

: Yes

: No

: No

: No

: Yes

: No

: Yes

5.ERROR LOG

TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27 XX-00000008

02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41 XX-00000140

(See Remarks)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-PANASONIC -

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - P A N A S O N I C - * * * * * - 0 0 0 1 - * * * * * * * *

Remarks:

XX-00000140

Page Count

00 : Printer Error

02 : Scanner Error

248

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

* * * * * * * * * * - F 7 T O T A L C O U N T E R L I S T - * * * * * * D A T E M M M - d d - y y y y * * * T I M E 1 2 : 0 1 * * * P . 0 1

F7-01 Key Operator ID Code

F7-02 Total Count

F7-03 PM Count

F7-04 Scanner PM Count

F7-05 . . . . .

F7-06 OPC Drum Count

F7-07 Process Unit Count

F7-08 ADF/i-ADF PM Count

F7-09 . . . . .

F7-10 Developer Count

F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count

F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count

F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count

F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count

F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count

F7-16 2-Sided Count

F7-29 A4/LETTER Count

F7-30 A4-R/LETTER-R Count

F7-31 A3/LEDGER Count

F7-32 B4/LEGAL Count

F7-17 ADF/i-ADF Count

F7-18 ADF/i-ADF Read Count

F7-19 Scanner Count

F7-20 Scanner Read Count

: 000

: 295

: 295

: 61

:

: 295

: 295

: 50

:

: 295

: 147

: 90

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 28

: 284

: 73

: 19

: 0

: 26

: 26

: 61

: 18

Ver. 1.0

249

SEP 2006

5.1.3.

F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test

Set the machine to service mode, and press "4" key on the Keypad.

↓

Press the "START" key.

↓

Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key.

↓

Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.

↓

When the “CLEAR” key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted.

↓

Press “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

1. Check Input

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Function

000 Toner Screw Motor Over

Current

Paper Tray Detection

Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)


Sensor

(1st Paper Tray)

F4 Mode (Check Input)

Condition

Message Display

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Over Current is detected.

Power Supply Fan Signal Normal.

003 Paper Tray Unit Option

Detection Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)

Unit is installed.

Paper Tray is opened.

Paper Tray is opened.

0

1

0

0

0

Paper is not detected.

1 NP Sensor

(Sheet Bypass)

Paper Length Sensor

(Sheet Bypass)

Size Sensor (PC1)

(Sheet Bypass)

Size Sensor (PC2)

(Sheet Bypass)




1

1

1

Remarks

250

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Function


Condition


Message Display

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 004 Size Sensor (PC3)

(Sheet Bypass)

ADU Detection Sensor

JAM Access Cover Open

Detection Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)

Upper Limit Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)

Upper Limit Sensor

(1st Paper Tray)

NP Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)

NP Sensor

(1st Paper Tray)

005 Total Counter Detection

Sensor

Unit is connected.

Cover is open.

Upper Limit is detected.




Counter is not detected.

Polygon Motor Lock Signal Normal.

Main Motor Lock Signal Normal.

Fuser Fan Lock Signal


Detection Sensor

Normal.

Toner Waste Container is detected.

Toner Waste Container Full

Detection Sensor

Toner Bottle Motor

Rotation Detection Sensor

006 ADU Paper Sensor

Fuser Exit Sensor

Toner Waste Container is full.

Lock

Paper is detected.

Paper is detected.

Paper is detected.

Registration Sensor

(2nd Paper Tray)

Registration Sensor

008 Front / Left Cover Open

Sensor 1

Paper is detected.

See Remarks.

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

*

0

0

0

Remarks

Front / Left Cover is closed.

Signal 1 = 0

Signal 2 = 0

Right Cover is open.

Signal 1 = 1

Signal 2 = 1

Developer Unit Detecting

Sensor

Unit is connected.

1

251

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Function

009 JAM Access Cover Open

Detection Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)


Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)

Upper Limit Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)


Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)

Feed Motor Lock Signal

(3rd Paper Tray)


Sensor 2

(3rd Paper Tray)


Condition

Cover is open.

Message Display

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0

Paper Tray is not connected.


Unit is connected.

Normal.

See Remarks.

0

0

0

0

*


Sensor 1

(3rd Paper Tray)

See Remarks.

*

Remarks

Unit is connected.

Signal 1 = 1

Signal 2 = 0

A different signal pattern, indicates that the unit is not connected, or CST 3

PCB is defective.

010 Registration Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)

JAM Access Cover Open

Detection Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)


Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)

Upper Limit Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)

NP Sensor

(3rd Paper Tray)

Registration Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)

NP Sensor

(4th Paper Tray)

011 Corona Leak Detection

Paper is detected.

Cover is open.

Paper Tray is connected.



Paper is detected.


Leak

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

252

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Function

020 Size Sensor C

(Not Used)

Size Sensor B

(Not Used)

Size Sensor A

(Not Used)

Size Sensor Z

(Not Used)

Size Sensor Y

(Not Used)

Size Sensor X

(Not Used)

021 Home Position Sensor


Condition

Original detected on the

C position.


B position.


A position.


Z position.


Y position.


X position.

ADF/Platen Cover Open

Sensor

ADF/Platen Cover Angle

Sensor

Home position is detected.

ADF/Platen Cover is open.

ADF/Platen Cover is open more than 30

° angle.

No Lighting Fuser Lamp Disconnect

Detection Sensor

+24V Line Error Detecting

Signal

030 ADF B1 Sensor

ADF B2 Sensor

+24V Line is ON.

Original is detected.



ADF Paper Exit Detection

Sensor

ADF Inverting Cover Open

Detection Sensor

Cover is open.

ADF Cover Open

Detection Sensor

Cover is open.

ADF Detection Sensor 1 See Remarks.

Message Display

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1

*

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

1

1

-

1

1

1

1

1

ADF Detection Sensor 2 See Remarks.

*

Z

Y

X

C

Remarks

Platen

B

Front Side

A iADF

Signal 1 = 1

Signal 2 = 1

ADF

Signal 1 = 1

Signal 2 = 0

A different signal pattern, indicates that the unit is not connected.

031 ADF Original Sensor Original is detected.

ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected.

ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected.


ADF Original Length

Sensor 2

ADF Original Length

Sensor 1


1

1

1

1

1

253

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2. Check Output

Press the "START" key to start, and press the "STOP" key to reset.

No.

040 Total Counter

Item

054-

055

Not Used

056 Fuser Fan

057-

060

Not Used

061 Registration Clutch

F4 Mode (Output Check)

Function

When SPC PCB CN715-8 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, count up the Total Counter.

041-

049

Not Used

050 Main Motor

051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In

Forward Direction

052 Toner Screw Motor

053 Power Supply Fan

When SPC PCB CN723-2 signal level changes to 0V from +5V, the

Main Motor activates.


Motor rotates in the forward direction.


Clutch activates.

When SPC PCB CN704-9,10,

CN709-16 are 24V, Power Supply

Fan rotates high-speed.

When SPC PCB CN709-13 is 24V,

Fuser Fan rotates.

062 Not Used

063 Paper Feed Roller Clutch

(1st Paper Tray)

064 Lift Motor

(1st Paper Tray)

065 ADU Solenoid

When SPC PCB CN715-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.

When SPC PCB CN715-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.

When SPC PCB CN706-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction.

When SPC PCB CN728-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.

066-

069

Not Used


(2nd Paper Tray)

071 Lift Motor

(2nd Paper Tray)

When CST2 PCB CN773-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.

When CST2 PCB CN774-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction.

1 minute

1 minute

1 minute

1 minute

Remark

254

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Item

072 Intermediate Roller Clutch

(2nd Paper Tray)


Function


073-

074

Not Used

075 Paper Feed Motor

(3rd Paper Tray)


(3rd Paper Tray)

077 Lift Motor

(3rd Paper Tray)


(3rd Paper Tray)

When CST3 PCB CN805-4 signal level changes to 0V from +5V, activate the Motor.




079 Not Used


(4th Paper Tray)

081 Lift Motor

(4th Paper Tray)


(4th Paper Tray)




083-

084

Not Used

085 Paper Feed Roller Solenoid

(Sheet Bypass)

When SPC PCB CN715-6 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.

086-

119

Not Used

120 Lamp When SPC PCB CN656-3 signal level changes to +5V from 0V, Lamp operates.

121-

159

Not Used

160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating

(35% speed rotating)





163 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse

Rotating


ADF paper feed motor rotates at

35% speed.


100% speed.


200% speed.

ADF paper feed motor rotates in reverse at 35% speed.

1 minute

Remark

1 minute

1 minute

1 minute

1 minute

1 minute

255

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Item


Rotating



Function



Rotating



166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 1 When ADF PCB CN22-10 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.



169 ADF Paper Exit Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 3 second.

170-

171

Not Used

172 ADF Solenoid

173 ADF Inverting Solenoid

174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid

175 ADF Stamp Solenoid

When ADF PCB CN26-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 1 second.




DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Remark

Ver. 1.0

256

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.1.4.

F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)

Set the machine to Service Mode, and press "5" key on the Keypad.

↓


↓

Enter the desired code number, or press “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.

↓

If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow keys.

↓

Press the "SET" key.

↓

Enter the desired function code number, and press “SET” key.

↓


↓

Press “STOP” key, then press “FUNCTION”, and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

↓

Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

No.

00 Not Used

Item

01 Frequency Desired

02 Not Used

03 LSU Startup Speed

04 LSU Off Timer

05 Not Used

06 Job Tracking Server

07-08 Not Used

09 Fuser Lamp Control

10 Exit Tray Limitation

(Up to 250 Sheets)

0 : Auto

1 : 50 Hz

2 : 60Hz

F5 Mode

Function

0 : Low

1 : Full

1 : 5 sec.

2 : 10 sec.

3 : 15 sec.

4 : 20 sec.

6 : 30 sec.

8 : 40 sec.

10 : 50 sec.

12 : 60 sec.

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : Off

1 : Auto

0 : None

1 : Accumulate

2 : Job

1

3

Default Setting

2 (for USA / Canada)

1 (for Europe)

0


1 (for Europe)

0

(Effective from August

2004 Production)

257

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

11 Replace Drum

12

13

14

Item

Replace Drum

(Except USA / Canada)

Printer Fan Extension

Paper Out Red Indicator

Paper Size Tray 1

15 Paper Size Tray 2



18 Not Used

19 T Corona Current Auto Adj.

20 ADF

21 Not Used

22 System Console

23-25 Not Used

26 2-Sided Unit

27-30 Not Used

31 ADF Duplex Scanning

32 Job Build, and SADF Mode

33 TH Sensor (Laser duty)

0 : No

1 : Auto

0 : No

1 : Auto

0 : No

1 : Auto

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Mid

2 : Large

0 : Off

1 : On

F5 Mode

Function

0 : Off

1 : User (Displays Replace Drum)

2 : Service (Enables Check & Call function)

5 : 5 min

2 : 2 min

0 : Non

0 : On

1 : Off

0 : None

1 : A3

2 : B4

3 : A4

4 : A4-R

5 : B5

6 : B5-R

7 : A5

8 : A5-R

9 : 8 x 13

10 : 8.5 x 13

11 : LEDGER

12 : LEGAL

13 : LETTER

14 : LETTER-R

15 : INVOICE

Same as F5-14

Same as F5-14

Same as F5-14

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Auto

34-37 Not Used

258

Ver. 1.0

1

1

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Default Setting

0

(Effective from August

2004 Production)

0

(Effective from Oct.

2004 Production)

5

0


1 (for Europe)

(for DP-8020P/8020E)

(for DP-8020P/8020E)

1

(for DP-8020P/8020E)

1

1

0

1

SEP 2006

No.

Item

38 2-Sided Mode Default

39 Not Used

40

41

42

Double Count

Count Up Timing

KEY/DEPT. Counter

0 : No

1 : LDR

2 : LDR, LGL

3 : A3

4 : A3, B4

0 : At feed

1 : At exit

0 : No

1 : Key Cntr

2 : DEPT.

3 : Card

Same as F5-41 43 Key Counter Timing

44 Not Used

45 Dept Code Reentry Again 0 : Yes

1 : No

46 Not Used

47 TH Sensor (T corona current) 0 : No

1 : Mid

2 : Large

48 TH Sensor (DEV) 0 : No

1 : Mid

2 : Large

49 Not Used

50 Auto Contrast Adjust

51

52

53

54

Dept. Counter (COPY)

Dept. Counter (FAX)

2-Sided Auto Shift

Margin Reduction

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Auto sft

0 : No

1 : Yes

55 Margin Value Default

0 : No

1 : 1 to 2

2 : 2 to 2

3 : B to 2

F5 Mode

Function

56

57

Edge Value Default

Book Value Default

0 : 5 mm

1 : 10 mm

2 : 15 mm

3 : 20 mm

0 : 5 mm

1 : 10 mm

2 : 15 mm

3 : 20 mm

0 : 15 mm

1 : 20 mm

2 : 25 mm

3 : 30 mm

259

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

0

Default Setting

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0


3 (for Europe)

SEP 2006

No.

58 U14 Clear

Item

59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm

60 Auto Tray Selection

61 TDC Auto Adj.

(DEV Conditions)

62 TDC Auto Adj.(DEV life)

63 U13 Clear

64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER)

65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER)

66-68 Not Used

69 Reduce N in 1 Space

70 PM Cycle

71 Add Toner Time Limit

72-75 Not Used

76

77

78

TH Sensor (Corona, Grid)

TH Sensor (Bias DC)

A4/LTR Size Select

79 Not Used

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : 1.5 K

2 : 2.5 K

3 : 5 K

4 : 10 K

5 : 15 K

6 : 20 K

7 : 30 K

8 : 40 K

9 : 60 K

10 : 80 K

11 : 90 K

12 : 120 K

13 : 150 K

14 : 200 K

15 : 240 K

0 : Unlimited

1 : 1/3 Limited

2 : 2/3 Limited

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

F5 Mode

Function

0 : Continue

1 : Any Keys

0 : Stop

1 : Continue

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : Any keys

1 : Func + 1

0 : No

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : Yes

0

12

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

Default Setting

0

1

1

0

260

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

80 Paper Size Priority

81

82

Item

B4/FLS Size Selection

Manual Skyshot Mode

83 Digital Skyshot Mode

84 Paper Tray Priority

85 Side Void Setting (ADF)

86 PM Cycle (Optics)

87

88

PM Cycle (ADF)

USB Port Function

0 : No

1 : Normal

2 : Quality

0 : S > C > B

1 : C > S > B

0 : None

1 : Yes

0 : No

1 : 40 K

2 : 60 K

3 : 120 K

4 : 240 K

5 : 360 K

6 : 480 K

7 : 600 K

0 : No

1 : 40 K

2 : 60 K

3 : 120 K

4 : 240 K

5 : 360 K

6 : 480 K

7 : 600 K

0 : Off

1 : Once

2 : ON

F5 Mode

Function

1 : A3

2 : B4

3 : A4

4 : A4-R

5 : B5

6 : B5-R

7 : A5

8 : A5-R

9 : 8 x 13

10 : 8.5 x 13

11 : LEDGER

12 : LEGAL

13 : LETTER

14 : LETTER-R

15 : INVOICE

0 : B4

1 : 8 x 13

2 : 8.5 x 13

0 : Off

1 : M1, On

2 : M2, On

3 : M1, M2, On

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Default Setting


3 (for Europe)

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

261

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

89 LAN Speed/Duplex

90

Item

TCH Panel Beep Sound

91 M1, Size Y

92 M1, Size X

93 M2, Size Y

94 M2, Size X

95 Paper Size (FA)

(Factory use only)

96 Bypass Detection


97 BP Tray B4/FLS/LGL (FA)


98 TH Sensor (Laser Power)

99

Not Used

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F5 Mode

Function

0 : Auto

1 : 10 Half

2 : 10 Full

3 : 100 Half

4 : 100 Full

0 : Off

1 : Soft

2 : Loud

Set the default size for Manual Skyshot

Mode, M1, and M2.

0 : Japan

1 : USA/CAN

2 : Europe

3 : Other

0 : Japan

1 : USA/CAN

2 : Europe

3 : Other

0 : B4

1 : 8 x 13

2 : 8.5 x 13

3 : LEGAL

0 : No

1 : Mid

2 : Large

0

1


2 (for Europe)


0 (for Europe)

1

Default Setting

160

70

220

95


2 (for Europe)

Ver. 1.0

262

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.1.5.

F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


Note:

The Factory Setting is different in each model.

No.

Item

00 Adj 100% Side-Side Read

01 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read

02 100% Selection

03 Original Registration

04 Printer Registration

05 Main Motor Speed

06 Polygon Motor Speed

07 Registration Void

08 Trail Edge Read Timing

09 Trail Edge Print Timing

10 Side Adjust (Bypass)

11 Side Adjust (Tray 1)



F6 Mode

Remarks

Adjustment for identical vertical (side-to-side) size ratio.

Adjustment for identical horizontal

(top-to-bottom) size ratio.

Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9%

Adjustment of platen original registration detection timing.

Delay time is adjusted from registration roller clutch ON.

Adjustment of Main Motor speed.

Adjustment Polygon Motor speed.

Registration void should be adjusted.

Adjustment of trail edge void.


Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass).

Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray).

Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray).

Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray).

Setting

Range

-9 - +9 0.1%

-9 - +9 0.1%

-9 - +9 0.1%

-30 - +30

0.2mm

-50 - +50

0.5mm

-10 - +10

0.1%

-5 - +5 0.1%

0 - +99

0.5mm

-9 - 0

0.5mm

-9 - +15

0.5mm

-8 - +7

0.5mm

-8 - +7

0.5mm

-8 - +7

0.5mm

-8 - +7

0.5mm

263

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Item


15 Not Used

16 Side Adjust (ADU)

17 Standard Grid Voltage

18 Standard Laser Power

19 Std Bias DC Voltage

20 Not Used

21 TDC Gain Voltage

22 DC Bias ON timing


23 DC Bias OFF timing


24-25 Not Used

26 TDC Judgment Level

27-29 Not Used

30 Light Halftone Adj.

31 Fuser Temperature

32 Fuser Edge Temperature

33 TDC Max. Read Only

34 TDC Min. Read Only

35 TDC Avg. Read Only

36 Paper Loop (Tray 1)

37 Not Used

38 F8-09 (TDC) Adjustment time


39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust

40 Transfer Current Side 1

41 Paper Loop (Bypass)


43 Paper Loop (2-Sided)

44 FAX Laser Duty Adj

45 Not Used

F6 Mode

Remarks

Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray).

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Setting

Range

-8 - +7

0.5mm

Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU).

Charge voltage compensation adjustment.

Laser power compensation adjustment.

Adjustment of bias standard voltage.

-8 - +7

0.5mm

-128 - +19

2.0V

-19 - +38

0.05mW

-128- +48

2.6V

Adjustment of toner density sensor gain voltage.

Adjustment of DC Bias ON timing.

Adjustment of DC Bias OFF timing.

-70 - +57

0.033V

-10 - +10

0.01Sec.

-10 - +10

0.01Sec.

Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement voltage level.

-26 - +26

0.02V

Halftone duty ratio adjustment

Adjustment of fuser temperature.

Temperature compensation for edges

Set by F8-20 TDC Check Operation



Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1

-127 - +127

-15 - +15

0.833

°C

-15 - +15

0.833

°C

-99 - +99

(Read only)

-99 - +99

(Read only)

-99 - +99

(Read only)

-99 - +99

Adjustment of TDC Adjustment timing.

Adjustment for the length of the loop formed before the copier timing roller.

Printer Density Adjustment for FAX.

(-) : Darker.

(+) : Lighter.

-1 - +5

60Sec.

-32 - +32 Adjustment of PWM value of LSU.

Adjustment of Transfer Current.

-62 - +110

0.15uA

Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass -99 - +99

Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 2 -99 - +99

-99 - +99

-99 - +99

264

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Item

46 PRINTER Laser Duty Adj

F6 Mode

Remarks

Printer Density Adjustment for Printer.

(-) : Darker.

(+) : Lighter.


Setting

Range

-99 - +99

47

48

Transfer Current Side 2

Transfer Current Envelope Adjustment of Transfer Current.

-62 - +110

0.15uA

-62 - +110

0.15uA

-99 - +99 49

50

51

T Mode Image Density

T/P Mode Image Density

P Mode Image Density

Image density adjustment for Text mode.

(-) : Darker.

(+) : Lighter.

Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo mode.

(-) : Darker.

(+) : Lighter.

Image density adjustment for Photo mode.

(-) : Darker.

(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

-99 - +99

52 Not Used

53 CCD Read Position Adj

54 T Mode Contrast

55 T/P Mode Contrast

56 P Mode Contrast

57 Not Used

58 Corona Charger Current

Adjustment of CCD read position.

Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode.

Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode.

Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode.

-42 - +44

0.2mm

-128 - +127

-128 - +127

-128 - +127

Adjustment of Corona Charge Current.

59

60

61

62

Trail Edge Trans (Trays)

Trail Edge Trans (Bypass)

Trail Edge Trans (2Sided)

TDC Gain Voltage Adjust

Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage

Timing Adjustment for Trays 1-4 feeding.


Timing Adjustment for Bypass Tray feeding.


Timing Adjustment for the 2nd side of 2-Sided printing.

Adjustment of Toner Density sensor gain voltage.

Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point.

63 Lead Edge Read Timing

(Adjustment for Double Exposure

Copy Mode, for details, and adjustment procedure, refer to

Sect. 3.9.8.)

64 Side Edge Read Adjust

(Adjustment for Double Exposure

Copy Mode, for details, and adjustment procedure, refer to

Sect. 3.9.8.)


(Small Width)


Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point.


-77 - +76

1.3uA

-30 - +30

0.5mm

-30 - +30

0.5mm

-30 - +30

0.5mm

-10 - +10

0.033V

0 - +9

0.5mm

0 - +9

0.5mm

-20 - +20

0.15uA

265

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Item


(Small Width)


67 ADF Image Density


69 Stamp Position Adjust

70 Not Used

71 ADF Read Main Scan Pos.

(Reverse Side)

72 Original Lead Edge ADF

(Reverse Side)

73 Original Trail Edge ADF

(Reverse Side)

74 Stamp Position Adjust

(Reverse Side)

75-76 Not Used

77 Add Toner Level


79 MTF Adjust

80 Laser Power Control


81 Grid voltage Control


82 Bias DC Voltage Control


83 Temperature Sensor Value

84 Humidity Sensor Value

85 Not Used

86 ADF Reverse Stop Posi.

87 ADF Exhaust Stop Posi.

88-89 Not Used

90 ADF Image Read Start

91 Original Lead Edge ADF

92 Original Trail Edge ADF

93 ADF 100% Image 1-Sided

94 ADF 100% Image 2-Sided

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F6 Mode

Transfer Current

Remarks

Compensation of ADF image density.


Adjustment of verification stamp position.

Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read start position.

Adjustment of ADF Original Lead Edge

Adjustment of ADF Original Trail Edge

Adjustment of Stamp Position

-99 - +99

0.05mm

-99 - +99

0.3mm

-127 - +127

0.3mm

-50 - +50

0.3mm

Adjustment of Toner supply


Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.

Value of Gamma Table for Photo Mode.

Value of Laser duty of Check pattern.

Value of Laser duty of Black pattern.

Value of Temperature sensor.

Value of Humidity sensor.

-1 - +1

1

-99 - +99

-2 - +2

1

-99 - +99

(Read Only)

-99 - +99

(Read Only)

-99 - +99

(Read Only)

0 - 255

(Read Only)

0 - 255

(Read Only)

Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position.

Adjustment of ADF exit stop position

Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read start position.

Adjustment of original detection timing.

Adjustment of trail edge detection timing.

Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided.

Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided.

Setting

Range

-20 - +20

0.15uA

-99 - +99

-99 - +99

-50 - +50

0.3mm

-99 - +99

0.3mm

-99 - +99

0.3mm

-99 - +99

0.05mm

-99 - +99

0.3mm

-127 - 127

0.3mm

-9 - +9

0.1%

-9 - +9

0.1%

266

SEP 2006

No.

Item

95-96 Not Used

97


98 Not Used

99 F5/F6 Initialization

F6 Mode

Remarks

Adjustment of Timer

Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Setting

Range

-5 - +99

10Sec

Ver. 1.0

267

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.1.6.

F7 Mode: Electronic Counter


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


No.

Item

01 Key Operator ID Code

02 Total Count

03 PM Count

04 Scanner PM Count

05 Not Used

06 OPC Drum Count

07 Process Unit Count

08 ADF PM Count

09 Not Used

10 Developer Count

11 Sheet Bypass Count

12 1st Paper Tray Count

13 2nd Paper Tray Count

14 3rd Paper Tray Count

15 4th Paper Tray Count

16 2-sided Count

17 ADF Count

18 ADF Read Count

19 Scanner Count

20 Scanner Read Count

21 Copy Print Count

22 Copy Scan Count

23 PC Print Count

24 PC Scan Count

F7 Mode

Remarks

Key Operator’s identification code for access to the counter mode.

Total count for all copies / prints.

Preventive Maintenance count.

PM count for scanner readings.

PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC

Drum.

PM count of recording paper fed through the

Process Unit.

PM count of originals fed through the ADF.

PM count of recording paper fed through the

Developer.

Total count of paper fed from the sheet bypass.

Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray.

Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray.

Total count of paper fed from the 3rd paper tray.

Total count of paper fed from the 4th paper tray.

Total count of 2-sided Print.

Total count of originals fed through the ADF.

Total count of originals scanned through the ADF.

Total count of scanning operations.

Total count of scanner readings.

Total count of copies printed.

Total count of copies scanned.

Total count printed from PC.

Total count scanned to PC.

268

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

25 Fax Transmit Count

26 Fax Receive Count

Item

27 Fax Print Count

28 Total OPC Rotation Time

29 A4/LT Count

30 A4R / LETTER R Count

31 A3 / Ledger Count

32 B4 / LEGAL Count

99 All Counter Clear

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F7 Mode

Remarks

Total count of Fax transmitted.

Total count of Fax received.

Total count of Fax printed.

Total Time of OPC Rotation.

Total count of A4 / Letter Print.

Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.

Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.

Total count of B4 / Legal Print.

All counters are cleared.

5.1.7.

F8 Mode: Service Adjustment


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


No.

Item

00 Exp. Lamp Replacement

01-05 Not Used

06 Error Log Print/View

07 Error Log Clear

F8 Mode

Remarks

When replacing the exposure lamp.

Procedure: a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics home position) where it can be replaced.

b) To return the optical system to the home position, press the CLEAR key.* a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine errors, or paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest code.

Note:

Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.

a) Press the Reset key.

A Message "Error code can be cleared with the

Start key" is displayed on the LCD.* b) Press the Start key.

269

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

08


Item

09 Toner Density Adjustment

10 Drum Charge Adjustment

11 Not Used

12 Org.size Sensor Adj.

(Not Used)

13 Black Density Reference

14 OPC Counter Reset

15-17 Not Used

18 LSU PWM Pattern

19 Move Mirror To Lock

20

48

TDC Check Operation

21-46 Not Used

47 ADF Continuous Test

Platen Continuous Test

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F8 Mode

Remarks

Lock operation for Scanner Unit.

Adjustment operation of Toner Density.

Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.

Adjust the slice level for the original size detection sensors automatically. Execute this mode by closing the platen cover.

Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.

Proceed when OPC is replaced.

Print out the Test Pattern.

Proceed when the LSU is replaced.

a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the locked position for transporting the copier.

b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will not accept any numerical key input.

Note:

The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again.

Adjustment of TDC sensor.

Press START key to begin.

Press START key to begin.

Ver. 1.0

270

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.1.8.

F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


↓


F9 Mode

Service

Mode

F9 Unit

Maintenance

Item Remarks

00 Fax Service Mode

01 Service Alert Tel #

02 Firmware

Version

03 Print

Device Info.

00 SC

01 SC Boot

Displays the contact number when a machine malfunction occurs.

Displays the firmware version for SC.

Displays the firmware version for SC

Boot.

Displays the firmware version for PNL.

Displays the firmware version for SPC.

02 PNL

03 SPC

04 Not Used

05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX option 1.

06 Not Used

07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.

00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5, and F6 modes.

01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.

02 Counter Information Prints the Counter information list.

Prints the system memory setting.

03 System Address

Info.

04 RAM Address

Information

Prints the RAM data dump list.

04 RAM Edit

Mode

0 Relative Address

1 Absolute Address

05 Serial Number

Setting of Relative address.

Setting of Real address.

Registration of Serial Number for

Maintenance.

Clears by Shipment Set.

271

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

F9 Mode

Service

Mode

F9 Unit

Maintenance

Item Remarks

06 RAM

Initialize

07 Firmware

Update

08 Program

Backup

(Refer to

Sect. 3.7.)

00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax, and Function parameters to default values.

Note:

Turn the Power Switch to the OFF, and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

02 LBP Error Log Clear Clears LBP Error log

03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,

Parameter Initialize & Resets the

Counters (Fax).

04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.

05 Dept. Counter Clear Resets the Counter

06 Flash Memory Clear Clears the Flash Memory Data

00 Update FROM Card Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card.

01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine with the USB.

00 Main

01 Option 1 all

02 Option 1 a

03 Option 1 b

04 Not Used

05 Not Used

06 Not Used

09 Update Program Card

Onboard F-ROM 4MB

Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB

Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)

Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)

Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB

Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)

Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)

Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB, or

8MB Flash Memory Card will be required depending upon the model.

10 Program

Copy

00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.

01 Not Used

02 From slot 1 to card

03 Not Used

04 Not Used

05 Not Used

11 Parameter Backup

12 Parameter Restore

13 Page Memory Size

14 Sort Memory Size

Backup the Parameter.

Restore the Parameter.

Displays the page memory size (MB).

Displays the sort memory size (MB).

272

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)

5.2.1.

Fax Service Mode Procedure

1. To enter the Fax Service Mode a. Press “FAX/EMAIL” key.

b. Press “FUNCTION”, and then “7” keys.

c. Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

d. Enter the desired code number, or press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.

2. To exit the Fax Service Mode

Press “STOP” key.

Note:

The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:

"START":

"V”

"/\ “

: The new setting value is stored in the machine.

: Scroll the function parameter number down.

: Scroll the function parameter number up.

5.2.2.

FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit, and determining the condition of the unit.

No.

00 Not Used

Service Mode

01 Function Parameter Setting

Service Modes (For Facsimile)

Description

02

03

04

RAM Edit Mode

Print Parameter List / Report

Modem Tests

Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position, etc.).

Factory use only.

Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer

Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace, and Toner Order

Form.

Generates various binary, tonal, and DTMF signals, by the modem.

05 Not Used

06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM, and restore the default value of the function parameters.

Note:

Turn the Power Switch to the OFF, and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

07 Not Used

08 Check & Call

09 System Maintenance

Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,

Maintenance Alert Report, and Toner Order Form.

Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter

Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the

PC to the Flash Card, and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.

273

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.3.

Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)

Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.

Enter the desired code number, and press “START” key.

↓

If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.

↓

Select the desired function code, and press the "START" key.

↓


↓

Press “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

Function Parameter Table

No.

Parameter Selections

000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor

2 = Tel/Dial

Function

Selects whether the machine starts to TX automatically during On-Hook dialing.

Monitor

: Start to TX after pressing START

TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically

001 Alarm Status

002 Stop Comm.

JRNL

003 Continuous Poll

004 Numeric ID Set

1 = Off

2 = Timer

3 = Constant

1 = Off

2 = On

1 = Off

2 = Stn (Tx only)

3 = Hub (Rx only)

1 = Off (will not accept)

2 = On (accepts)

Selects the No Paper, or No Toner alarm status.

OFF

Timer

: Alarm is disabled.

: Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.

Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is pressed, or the error is cleared/ corrected.

Selects whether the machine prompts to print the

COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to

INC, and STOP is pressed during communication.

Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is enabled.

Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF, or Platen, then press the assigned Program Key to store, or add the documents into a polled file.

(See Note 1)

Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the machine will continuously poll originals from the remote stations until it is interrupted by pressing "STOP".

Selects whether the machine accepts, and allows to set, or change the Numeric ID.

274

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Parameter


Selections

005 Destination Code 000 : Austria

001 : U.K.

002 : Canada

003 : Denmark

004 : Taiwan

005 : Finland

006 : Germany

007 : Netherlands

008 : Italy

009 : Spanish

010 : Hong Kong

011 : Australia

012 : Switzerland

013 : Norway

015 : Portuguese

016 : Ireland

017 : Belgium

018 : Sweden

019 : Turkey

020 : U.S.A.

021 : France

022 : New Zealand

025 : Japan

029 : Poland

030 : Czech

031 : Russia

032 : Greece

033 : Hungary

034 : Indonesia

035 : South Korea

038 : Malaysia

039 : China

045 : Thailand

048 : South Africa

049 : Singapore

050 : Universal

051 : East Euro

Function

Specified destinations only.

006 ID Display Selects the priority of displaying the ID.

007 JRNL Column

008 Monitor

009 DC Loop

010 TX Level

011 RX Level

1 = Number (Numeric ID)

2 = Chara (Character ID)

1 = Station

2 = RCV’D ID

1 = Off

2 = On

1 = Off (Normal)

2 = On (Off Hook)

00 = 0 dBm

~

15 = -15 dBm

1 = -43 dBm

2 = -38 dBm

3 = -33 dBm

4 = -48 dBm

Selects the contents of the ID to display on the

Journal.

Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for monitoring fax signals.

(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)

Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back communication test.

Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1

dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)

Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 dBm.

275

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Parameter

012 DTMF Level

013 G3 RX EQL

014 G3 TX EQL

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Selections

00 = 0 dBm

~

15 = -15 dBm


Function

Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm steps.

1 = 0dB

2 = 4dB

3 = 8dB

4 = 12dB

1 = 0dB

2 = 4dB

3 = 8dB

4 = 12dB

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,

0dB, 4dB, 8dB, or 12dB.

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB, or 12dB.

015 ~

016

Not Used

017 TX Start

018 RX Start

019 ITU-T V.34

020 ITU-T ECM

021 EP Tone

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

TC7200

TC9600

12000 bps

14400 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

TC7200

TC9600

12000 bps

14400 bps

1 = Off

2 = On

3 = Select

1 = Off (Invalid)

2 = On (Valid)

1 = Off (without EP Tone)

2 = On (with EP Tone)

Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on

V.29 mode.

(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

On : Add

Off : Do not add

Selects the time interval between the receiving signal, and the transmitting signal.

022 Signal Interval 1 = 100 ms

2 = 200 ms

3 = 500 ms

023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short)

2 = Long

024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)

2 = 2100 Hz

025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First

2 = Second

Selects the transmission modem start speed,

14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/

2400 bps.

Press “V”, or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.

Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32.

Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/

12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.


Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33.

Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On, or

Select.

Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, or On, when entering Phone Book Dialing

Numbers, or Manual Number Dialing.

Select the ECM mode.

Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short

Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz

Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT, and Polling).


276

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Parameter

026 Non-Standard


Selections

1 = Off (Invalid)

2 = On (Valid)

Function

Selects own mode (Panafax mode).

027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid)

2 = On (Valid)

028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid)

2 = On (Valid)

Selects the short protocol mode.

029 Remote

Diagnostics

1 = Off (will not accept)

2 = On (accepts)

030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms

2 = 1 sec

031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6)

2 = On (EOLx12)

032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps

Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.

Selects whether the machine accepts Remote

Diagnostics from the service station.

Selects the pause interval between the CED, and the 300 bps signal.


Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6, or EOLx12.

033 V34 RX Start

034 V34 TX SR

035 V34 RX SR

2400-33600bps

2400-3429sr

2400-3429sr

Selects the transmission modem start speed for

V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.


Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.


Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/

3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.


Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/

3000/2800/2400 sr.


036 Not Used

037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed)

2 = On (displayed)

Selects whether to display the modem speed during communication.

(Press the Job Status Key to display)

038 Not Used

039 Flash Time Selects the pause interval before activating the

Flash key.

040 Flash Time

(PSTN)

041 Pause Time

5 = 50 ms

~

100 = 1000 ms

5 = 50 ms

~

100 = 1000 ms

1 = 1 sec.

~

10 = 10 sec.

Selects the pause interval before activating the

Flash key.

(For Germany, Austria, and Czech)

Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for dialing through a switchboard, or for international calls.

042 Not Used

043 Redial Interval

044 Redial Count

0 = no waiting

~

15 = 15 minutes

0 = no redial

~

15 = 15 times

0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only)

Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 minute steps.

Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step intervals.

Note:

In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.

277

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Parameter

045 Ring Detect

Count

046 On-Hook Time

047 Response Wait

Interval

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Selections

1 = 1 ring

~

9 = 9 rings


Function

Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in

1 ring step intervals.

0 = 0 sec.

~

90 = 90 sec.

1 = 1 sec.

~

90 = 90 sec.

Selects the on-hook time between sequential communication calls in 1 second step intervals.

Selects the waiting interval for the response after completing the dialing.

048~

049

Not Used

20 ~ 150 sec.

(For France Only)

050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal

2 = Rough

051 Not Used

052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps

2 = 20 pps

053~

054

Not Used

055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off

2 = On

056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off

2 = On

057 DC Loop Check

(Except for USA, and Canada)

1 = Off

2 = On

058 Comm. JRNL +

Image

059 Confidential RCV

Report

060 Version

1 = Off (without image)

2 = On (with image)

1 = Off (does not print out)

2 = On (prints out)

Indicates the Host software version.

061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:******

RX:****** CPY:******

062 Print Counter 1 = Off

2 = On

Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.

Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.

Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number.

Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication.

Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.

Journal with image.

Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential

RCV Report.

Displays the transmitted, received, total printed, and copied document count.

Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, the counter information that is displayed in the

Function Parameter No. 61.

063~

067

Not Used

068 NYSE Fax

Forward

(USA, and

Canada Only)

1 = Off

2 = On

Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals.

Selects whether the machine will forward the incoming, and outgoing faxes to a specified station.

Note:

Once this parameter is activated, Fax

Forwarding via Fax Parameter No. 054 is automatically disabled, an Access Code of

"0000" is automatically assigned, and Fax

Parameter No. 038 has a new setting added called "NYSE".

278

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Parameter

069 NYSE Local Print

(USA, and

Canada Only)

070 Line Error

071 Total Error


Selections

1 = Inc

2 = On (Always)

Function

Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes after FAX Forwarding.

INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.

ON : Always prints.

128 lines

256 lines

512 lines

1024 line

2048 lines

Off

(will not disconnect line)

1 = 5%

2 = 10%

3 = 15%

4 = 20%

072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited)

2 = 3 lines/STD

3 = 6 lines/STD

4 = 12 lines/STD

1. Selects the line disconnect condition during reception. If the number of line errors exceed this setting, the unit will disconnect the line.


2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or

RTN/PIN.

(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to

"LINES") (See Note 1)

Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/

PIN.

(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)

(See Note 2)

Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6, or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit

RTN/PIN.

(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)

Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.

073 Error Detect

074 RTN Receive

075 Coding

076 Batch TX

(USA, and

Canada Only)

1 = MH (MH only)

2 = MR (MH, or MR)

3 = MMR

(MH, or MR, or MMR)

4 = JBIG

1 = Off

2 = On

077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited)

2 = 2 m

078~

079

Not Used

080 Doc Top Feed

1 = Lines

2 = Rate

1 = Disconnect

2 = Continue

081 Doc End Feed

082 JAM Length

-99

~

+99

-90

~

+127

1 = 1 m

2 = 2 m

Selects whether to disconnect the phone line, or continue when "RTN" is received.

Selects the coding scheme.

Selects whether the batch transmission is available.

Selects the maximum length of a received document that can be printed.

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor

ON position, and the scanning start position.

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor

OFF position, and the scanning end position.

Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned.

083 Not Used

084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring)

2 = Busy (keep line busy)

Selects whether to ring, or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out, or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.

085 Not Used

279

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

No.

Parameter

086 Reduction Fine 1 = Off

2 = On

087 Darker Level

088 Normal Level


089 Lighter Level

090 ~

091

Not Used

Selections

0 = Lightest Contrast

~

15 = Darkest Contrast

Selects the contrast level.

0

← →15

Lightest

← →Darkest

Function

Selects whether to fix with Fine Mode, or not for the

Reduction transmission.

Selects whether the smoothing function is available.

092 Smoothing 1 = Off

2 = On

093 ~

094

Not Used

095 Reduction Ratio (70-100)

096~

101

Not Used

102 Original

Registration

103 Trail Edge Read

Timing

-9

~

0

-30

~

+30

Selects Print Reduction Ratio (%).

Adjustment of original registration detection timing.


104~

109

Not Used

110 MAC Address

111 Not Used

112 Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off

2 = On

Indicates the MAC Address.

Selects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable, and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)

Note:

After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed

Numbers.

113~

114

Not Used

115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll

2 = Direct

116 Overwrite

Warning

1 = Yes

2 = No

Selects the setting method for Time Zone.

Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through the Time Zone Table.

Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.

Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email.

117~

121

Not Used

122 LDAP 1 = Off

2 = On

When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be displayed as different characters.

280

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

No.

Parameter

123 One Ring Sound

(USA, and

Canada Only)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Selections

1 = Off

2 = On

(Effective from Oct. 2004

Production)

Function

When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect

Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out loud, answering on the second ring count.

124 ~

199

Not Used

Note 1:

Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store, or add documents into a polled file in memory.

To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station".

The last Program Key will be assigned with the “Store 4 Poll” Key name automatically and cannot be changed.

To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF, or Platen and then press the Program Key to store, or add the document(s) into a polled file.

(

Note:

If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.)

Note 2:

Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/PIN

Signal

MCF/PIP

RTP/PIP

RTN/PIN

1:128

0-31

32-63

64-127

2:256

0-63

64-127

128-255

3:512

0-127

Setting

128-255

256-511

4:1024

0-255

512-1023

5:2048

0-511

256-511 512-1023

1024-2047

6:Off

Always

-

-

Note 3:

Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP, or RTN/PIN

Signal

MCF/PIP

RTP/PIP

RTN/PIN

1:5%

0-2

3-4

5-

2:10%

0-4

5-9

10-

Setting

3:15%

0-7

8-14

15-

4:20%

0-9

10-19

20-

Note 4:

The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications, or regulations. Print the

Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.

281

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.4.

Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports, and Test Results)

From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All

Document File, Protocol Trace, and the Toner Order Form.

5.2.4.1.

Function Parameter List

A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display.

↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Function Parameter List".

↓

Press the “SET” key.

↓

Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

Ver. 1.0

282

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

Normal 000 Mon/Tel Dial

001 Alarm Status

002 Stop Comm. JRNL

003 Continuous Poll

004 Numeric ID Set

005 Destination Code

006 ID Display

007 JRNL Column

008 Monitor

009 DC Loop

Monitor

Timer

On

Off

On

999

Chara

Station

Off

Off

050 Ring Det Mode

051 ----------

052 Pulse Rate

053 ----------

054 ----------

055 Busy Tone Check

056 Dial Tone Check

057 DC Loop Check

058 Comm. JRNL + Image

059 Conf. RCV Report

10pps

On

Off

Off

On

On

-9dBm

-43dBm

-5dBm

0dB

0dB

010 TX Level

011 RX Level

012 DTMF Level

013 G3 RX EQL

014 G3 TX EQL

015 ---------

016 ---------

017 TX Start

018 RX Start

019 ITU-T V.34

020 ITU-T ECM

021 EP Tone

022 Sig. Interval

023 TCF Check

024 CED Freq.

025 Comm. Start-Up

026 Non-Standard

027 Short Protocol B

028 Short Protocol D

029 Remote Diag.

14400bps

14400bps

On

On

Off

500ms

Normal

2100Hz

First

On

On

On

On

060 Version ..... AcV........

061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 000080/000168/000003/000000

062 Print Counter

063 ----------

Off

064 ----------

065 ----------

066 ----------

067 ----------

068 ----------

069 ----------

070 Line Error

071 Total Error

072 Conti. Error

073 Error Detect

074 RTN Receive

075 Coding

076 ----------

077 RX JAM Length

078 ----------

079 ----------

128

10

Off

Rate

Discon

JBIG

2 m

030 CED & 300bps

031 RTC = EQL x 12

032 V34 TX Start

033 V34 RX Start

034 V34 TX SR

035 V34 RX SR

036 ---------

037 Protocol Display

038 ---------

039 Flash Time

040 ---------

041 Pause Time

042 ---------

043 Redial Interval

044 Redial Count

045 Ring Det. Count

046 On-Hook Time

047 Response Wait

048 ---------

049 ---------

75ms

Off

33600bps

33600bps

3429sr

3429sr

Off

500ms

3sec

3min

5

2

5sec

55sec

080 Doc Top Feed

081 Doc End Feed

082 JAM Length

083 ----------

084 Line As NoPaper

085 ----------

086 Reduction Fine

087 Darker Level

088 Normal Level

089 Lighter Level

090 ----------

091 ----------

092 Smoothing

093 ----------

094 ----------

095 Reducton Ratio

096 ----------

097 ----------

098 ----------

099 ----------

0

0

2 m

Ring

On

2

8

4

On

100%

-PANASONIC -

***** ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********

Note:

1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.

2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

283

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.4.2.

Page Memory Test

A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory, and printer mechanism using the following procedure.


↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Page Memory Test".

↓


↓


************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

Ver. 1.0

SC

SC BOOT

PNL

SPC

FAX MODEM

SC2

:

:

:

TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666

MEMORY SIZE : (2 MB)

MAC ADDRESS

: SHIPMENT SET

: 08002300E078

:

:

-PANASONIC -

***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

284

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.4.3.

Printer Report

All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.


↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: Printer Report".

↓


↓


**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016

SERIAL NUMBER

CUSTOMER ID

FIRMWARE VERSION

SC

PNL

SPC

TRANSMIT COUNTER

RECEIVE COUNTER

COPY COUNTER

PRINT COUNTER

:

: 1234567890123456

:

:

:

: 000475

: 000398

: 000083

: 000016

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT

| NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 |

02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016

|

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-PANASONIC -

***** *******************-PANASONIC -*******-12345678901234567890-**************

Ver. 1.0

285

SEP 2006

5.2.4.4.

All Document Files

Print the document files from the Flash Memory.


↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "5: All Document Files".

↓


↓


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

286

SEP 2006

5.2.4.5.

Protocol Trace

Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.


↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys select the "6: Protocol Trace".

↓


↓


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******

STATUS : OK

MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD)

SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L

REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12

LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B

39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30

DCS 00 C6 F8 44

COMMAND LOG.

REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR

LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP

------------------------------------------------------------------

REMOTE : MCF

LOCAL : DCN

-PANASONIC -

****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************

Ver. 1.0

287

SEP 2006

5.2.4.6.

Toner Order Form

The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.


↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "7: Toner Order Form".

↓


↓


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

288

SEP 2006

*************************************

> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <

*************************************

Ship to:

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3) by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address

=========================

Bill to:

Attention:

Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)

Toner Bottle No.:

(6)

Attention:

Phone No.:

P.O. No.(if required):

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Print your name and title

Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)

(2) Dealer Name

(3) Toner Order Tel #

(4) Toner Order Fax #

(5) Customer ID

(6) Toner Bottle No.

Ver. 1.0

/ /

Signature & Date

“The toner supply in your machine is running low”

Up to 25 digits

Up to 36 digits

Up to 36 digits

Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

DQ-TU10J (For DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Except for USA, and Canada)

DQ-TUJ10K (For DP-8020E/8016P for USA, and Canada)

289

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.5.

Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)

5.2.5.1.

Binary Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.

↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Signal Test".

↓


↓

Press the desired number.

↓


↓


Binary Signal Table

Number

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

Signals

V21 300bps

V27ter 2400bps

V27ter 4800bps

V29 7200bps

V29 9600bps

V17 TC7200bps

V17 TC9600bps

V17 12000bps

V17 14400bps

Ver. 1.0

290

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.5.2.

Tonal Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.


↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "2: Tonal Test".

↓


↓

Press the desired number, and press the "START" key.

↓


Tonal Signal Table

Number

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

Signals

462 Hz

1080 Hz

1100 Hz

1300 Hz

1650 Hz

1850 Hz

2100 Hz

Ver. 1.0

291

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.5.3.

DTMF Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.

The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

• DTMF Single Tone


↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".

↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "1. Single".

↓


↓


• DTMF Dual Tone


↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".

↓


↓

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "2. Dual".

↓


↓


Number

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

DTMF Single Tone Table

DTMF Signal Tones

697 Hz

770 Hz

852 Hz

941 Hz

1209 Hz

1336 Hz

1477 Hz

1633 Hz

DTMF Dual Tone Table

8

9

6

7

*

#

Number

0

1

4

5

2

3

DTMF Dual Tones

941 Hz + 1336 Hz

697 Hz + 1209 Hz

697 Hz + 1336 Hz

697 Hz + 1477 Hz

770 Hz + 1209 Hz

770 Hz + 1336 Hz

770 Hz + 1477 Hz

852 Hz + 1209 Hz

852 Hz + 1336 Hz

852 Hz + 1477 Hz

941 Hz + 1209 Hz

941 Hz + 1477 Hz

292

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.5.4.

Binary Signal (V.34)

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34)


↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "4: V34 MODEM".

↓


↓


↓


11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

Number

01

02

03

04

05

06

19

20

21

15

16

17

18

Signals

V34 2400 sr 2400 bps

V34 2400 sr 4800 bps

V34 2400 sr 7200 bps

V34 2400 sr 9600 bps

V34 2400 sr 12000 bps

V34 2400 sr 14400 bps

V34 2400 sr 16800 bps

V34 2400 sr 19200 bps

V34 2400 sr 21600 bps

V34 2800 sr 4800 bps

V34 2800 sr 7200 bps

V34 2800 sr 9600 bps

V34 2800 sr 12000 bps

V34 2800 sr 14400 bps

V34 2800 sr 16800 bps

V34 2800 sr 19200 bps

V34 2800 sr 21600 bps

V34 2800 sr 24000 bps

V34 2800 sr 26400 bps

V34 3000 sr 4800 bps

V34 3000 sr 7200 bps

Binary Signal Table

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

Number

22

23

24

25

26

27

40

41

42

36

37

38

39

Signals

V34 3000 sr 9600 bps

V34 3000 sr 12000 bps

V34 3000 sr 14400 bps

V34 3000 sr 16800 bps

V34 3000 sr 19200 bps

V34 3000 sr 21600 bps

V34 3000 sr 24000 bps

V34 3000 sr 26400 bps

V34 3000 sr 28800 bps

V34 3200 sr 4800 bps

V34 3200 sr 7200 bps

V34 3200 sr 9600 bps

V34 3200 sr 12000 bps

V34 3200 sr 14400 bps

V34 3200 sr 16800 bps

V34 3200 sr 19200 bps

V34 3200 sr 21600 bps

V34 3200 sr 24000 bps

V34 3200 sr 26400 bps

V34 3200 sr 28800 bps

V34 3200 sr 31200 bps

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

Number

43

44

45

46

47

48

57

58

59

60

61

Signals

V34 3429 sr 4800 bps

V34 3429 sr 7200 bps

V34 3429 sr 9600 bps

V34 3429 sr 12000 bps

V34 3000 sr 19200 bps

V34 3429 sr 16800 bps

V34 3429 sr 19200 bps

V34 3429 sr 21600 bps

V34 3429 sr 24000 bps

V34 3429 sr 26400 bps

V34 3429 sr 28800 bps

V34 3429 sr 31200 bps

V34 3429 sr 33600 bps

ANSam

CM

JM

INFO0c & TONEB

INFO0c & TONEA

PPh & AC & ALT

293

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.6.

Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)

Initializes RAM, and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.

Note:

This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "6: RAM initialize" on the display.

↓

Press the “SET” key to select the desired Mode number.

↓

Press the "SET" key to initialize RAM.

↓


RAM Initialization Table

No.

Initialize Mode Description

01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax, and Function Parameters to default values.

Note:

Turn the Power Switch to the OFF, and back to the

ON position to enable the parameter settings.

02 JOURNAL CLEAR

03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR

Clears the Journal contents.

Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers, and Phone

Books.

04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR

05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR

Clears the Program keys.

Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.

06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.

07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number

80, and 81, then set default values.

08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.

09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

Ver. 1.0

294

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.7.

FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)

5.2.7.1.

Overview

This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage, and improve the machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:

1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.

2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.

3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number, or email address.

4. When the unit detects Low Toner, or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "8: Check & Call" on the display.

↓

Press the “SET” key to select the desired code number.

(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No., or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"

Mode key, and input the email address.)

↓


↓


5.2.7.2.

Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed, or transmitted

1. Manual print

The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)

2. Automatic transmission/printout a. Service Alert Report

When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service

Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.

b. Maintenance Alert Report

When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.

c. Toner Order Form

When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information.

d. Call Counter Report

When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call

Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number, or email address.

Note:

The Service, and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).

295

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Error

Code

Ex-xx

E13

Jxx

Uxx

U13

Log

O

Tx

Report

S

Remarks

Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.3.)

Out of Toner.

Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.2.)

Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.1.)

Low Toner.

M

Note:

TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report

Ver. 1.0

296

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.7.3.

SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

****************************

> SERVISE ALERT REPORT <

****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

SERIAL NUMBER :

: ABC COMPANY

SC :

PNL :

SPC :

CURRENT PM CYCLE

F7-02 Total Count : 13

F7-03 PM COUNT : 13

F7-04 Scanner PM Count 9

F7-05 . . . . . :

F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13

F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13

F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1

F7-10 Developer Count : 13

F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0

F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3




F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0

F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0

F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0

F7-19 Scanner Count : 0

F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0

F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0

F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0

(------)

120000

(------)

(------)

(------)

F7-23 PC Print Count : 0

F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6

F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0

F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0

F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0

F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0

F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0

F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0

F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0

F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0

Call Counter Pri-set Value : 999999

(4)

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |

02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |

|

|

|

|

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********


(1) Customer ID

(2) Firmware Version

(3) Counter Information

(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)

297

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.7.4.

MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT


****************************

> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <

****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

SERIAL NUMBER :

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY

(2)

FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

SC :

PNL :

SPC :

TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082

COPY COUNTER : 000000

PRINT COUNTER : 000000

(4)

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********



(2) Customer ID


(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters

“MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”


298

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

5.2.7.5.

Toner Order Form

*************************************

> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <

*************************************

Ship to:

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3) by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address

=========================

Bill to:

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Attention:

Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)

Toner Bottle No.:

(6)

Attention:

Phone No.:

P.O. No.(if required):

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

Print your name and title



(2) Dealer Name

(3) Toner Order Tel #

(4) Toner Order Fax #

(5) Customer ID

(6) Toner Bottle No.

/ /

Signature & Date

“The toner supply in your machine is running low”

Up to 25 digits

Up to 36 digits

Up to 36 digits


DQ-TU10J (For DP-8020E/8020P/8016P)

299

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.7.6.

CALL COUNTER REPORT


*****************************************************************

> SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE <

*****************************************************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

SERIAL NUMBER :

: ABC COMPANY

SC

PNL

SPC

:

:

:

CURRENT PM CYCLE

F7-23 PC Print Count

F7-24 PC Scan Count

F7-25 FAX Transmit Count

F7-26 FAX Receive Count

F7-27 FAX Print Count

F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate

F7-29 A4/LT Count

F7-30 A4R/LTR Count

F7-31 A3/LD Count

F7-32 B4/LG Count

: 0

: 6

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 0

: 0

(4)

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********


(1) Customer ID


(3) Counter Information

(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value

300

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

5.2.8.

Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)

5.2.8.1.

Overview

This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "9: System Maintenance" on the display.

↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.

↓

Select the desired Fax number.

↓

Press "START" to send the Fax.

After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.

Note:

If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.

Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

No.

Maintenance Mode

01 Send RCV'D File

System Maintenance Table

Description

Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine during a fatal printer error.

Ver. 1.0

301

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6 System Description

6.1.

Mechanical Operation

6.1.1.

Scanning Mechanism (Flatbed)

1. Scanning Mechanism

The Scanning Mechanism consisting of Lens, CCD PCB Assembly, Mirrors, Scanner Lamp, Lamp

Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket, is used to scan originals.

• The Mirror 1 and Mirrors 2 reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens.

• The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.

• The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electrical signal.

• The Timing Belt driven by the Stepping Motor, move the Scanner Assembly.

Scanning (S) Glass

Size Sensor 1

Mirror 2

Scanner Lamp

Reflection Plate

Lamp Base Bracket

Platen (L) Glass

Driving Wire

Scanning Motor

Timing Belt

Mirror 2

Mirror 1

Scanning Lens

CCD PC Board Assembly

2. Transmit Mechanism

a. When ADF is used, originals are scanned on the Scanning (S) Glass. The Platen (L) Glass is used when scanning on the Platen. b. The Scanning point is established by the setting on the Panel. c. Document size is manually set when the Platen is used.

d. The Transmit Mechanism starts feeding and scanning originals based on the above Document Size

Setting.

e. When scanning is completed, the Stepping Motor stops rotating and the Lamp Base and Mirror 2

Brackets return to the standby position.

During scanning, the Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket move in the direction of the Black arrow and while returning to standby position, it moves in the direction of the White arrow as shown in the illustration. The location of these two brackets and the scanning length are established by the setting on the Panel. The following illustration shows the Drive system.

302

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

When scanning originals

When returning to Standby position

Scanning Motor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Drive Shaft Assembly

Mirror 2 Bracket

Lamp Base Bracket

Ver. 1.0

303

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6.2.

Automatic Document Feeder

The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, one original at a time.

Its main features are:

1. Place originals Face-Up

2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)

3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre Feed Roller

The following is the ADF Mechanical operation description.

6.2.1.

Automatic Document Feeder

1. Initialization

The ADF begins its operation with the Eject phase in order to feed and eject any originals stuck inside the ADF. The ADF Motor starts rotating Feed Roller (2010), Exit 1 Roller (1812) and Ejecting the

Original, after a few seconds the Clutch (2324) reverses the rotation direction raising the Original

Stopper to its standby position.

2. Original Setting and Size Sensors

Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper.

Adjust the Original Front and Rear Guides (1711 & 1714) to center the original on the ADF. The

Original Stopper prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Photo Sensor (131) for

Original Detection detects the presence of Originals on the ADF when the original(s) actuate NP

Actuator (2008) on the Lower Paper Feed Guide (2002). The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC

Board (2832) which is installed in the Original Upper and Lower Trays (1712, 1706) are actuated by the

Original Front/Rear Guides, their position determines the original's width and 2 Photo Sensors (131) for

Original Length detect the length of the original.

3. Feeding and Separation

When the Start button is pressed, the Clutch (2324) starts to rotate and uppers the Original Stopper, causing the Pre Feed Roller (2018) to apply a downwards pressure against the originals. After a few seconds, the Clutch (2324) reverses the direction of rotation and the Pre Feed Roller is raised upwards along with the Original Stopper. The upper original is fed to the Paper Feed Roller (2001), and the

Separation Rubber (2024) prevents multiple feeding.

4. Transmission and Ejection

The original is fed into the Feed Roller (2010) and when the original actuates the Photo Sensor (131) for Read Point and Eject, the Paper Feed Roller (2001) stops rotating. The Photo Sensor (131) for

Read Point and Eject detects the scanning position and the Feed Roller (2010) transports the original while scanning. The Exit 1 Roller (1812) feeds and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.

5. Final Operation

After ejecting the last original on the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the

Original Stopper to its standby position.

304

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Automatic Document Feeder

Paper Feed Roller (2001)

Pre Feed Roller (2018)

Original Front and Rear Guide (1711, 1714)

Photo Sensor (131) for Original Length

Original Upper and Lower

Trays (1706, 1712)

Lower Paper Feed

Guide (2002)

Feed Roller (2010)

SNS PC Board (2832)

Exit 1 Roller (1812)

NP Actuator (2008)

Original Stopper (2016)

Photo Sensor (131) for Original Detection

Separation Rubber (2024)

Photo Sensor (131) for Read Point and Eject

Ver. 1.0

305

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6.3.

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

The i-ADF automatically inverts two-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This feature enables machines with a duplexer mounted to perform duplex copying.

An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions in a similar manner as the ADF (Automatic

Document Feeder), with the main exception being the document eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.

For DP-8020E only.

1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode

After passing through the Read Point Sensor (131), the path of the original is switched over by the

Duplex 2 Guide (2431), to the Exit Roller or to the Inverting Feed Roller (2428).For single-side scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid guiding the original to the Exit

Roller. For double-side scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid guiding the original to the Inverting Feed Roller (2428).The Duplex 2 Guide moves only once, in the direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before the

Start button is pressed. It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-sided scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).

2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original

The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the Duplex

2 Guide (2431) and Inverting 1 Guide (2432).

After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide, through the Inverting 1 Guide (2432) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid and is carried beyond the Inverting Feed Roller (2428) and upper Pinch Roller 1 (2130) into the Sub Tray (2209).

The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the

Duplex Eject Sensor (131) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.

Then, the Inverting 1 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF

Motor pulls the original back around the Feed 2 Roller (2517) and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.

After the Back side is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide, through the

Inverting 1 Guide and is carried beyond the Inverting Feed Roller and lower Pinch Roller 1 (2130) this time, into the Sub Tray, again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.

3. Eject by Reverse Rotation

For the originals to stack properly, the above process repeats one more time. The Inverting 1 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor pulls the original back around the Feed 2 Roller, however, this time the original is routed to the Exit 3 Roller (2515) and exits into the ADF Base.

4. Sub Tray

The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (2209), which supports the originals during the ejection mode of the double-side scanning operation.

The Release Lever Plate grasps the originals and prevents them from being ejected into the Sub Tray.

306

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

Pinch Roller 2

(Feed Skew Adjustment)

Original

Stopper

(2506)

(2018)

Original Detection Sensor (131)

Pinch Roller 1 (2130)

210 (A5)

215.9 (INVOICE)

257 (B5-R)

297 (A4-R)

330.2 (FLS1.2)

364 (B4)

38

420 (A3)

431.8 (Ledge

Eject Sensor

(131)

Feed 2 Roller

(2517)

Read Point

(2624)

(Registration Adjustment)

Inverting Feed Roller (2428)

Pinch Roller 1 (2130)

Inverting 1 Guide (2432)

Duplex 2 Guide (2431)

Exit 3 Roller (2515)

Stamp Head (1827)

Reversing 1 Guide (2516)

Sub Tray (2209)

Ver. 1.0

307

SEP 2006

6.4.

Receive Mechanism

6.4.1.

Paper Tray

1. Paper Tray (1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th)

< NP Sensor Operation >

NP Actuator

NP Sensor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P a. The NP Actuators attached to the Paper Feed Blocks No.1, 2, 3 and 4 determine if there is paper in the paper tray.

b. The paper in the paper tray lifts up the NP Actuator, allowing the light from the LED to actuate the

NP Sensor.

Ver. 1.0

308

SEP 2006

< Paper Tray Operation >

Clutch

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Registration Sensor

Registration Actuator

Registration Roller

Clutch

Pickup Roller

Feed Roller

Ver. 1.0

Separation Roller a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor starts driving the Gears.

b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.

The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and is transported.

c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the Registration

Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.

d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

309

SEP 2006

< Paper Tray (Optional) Operation >

Clutch

Intermediate Roller

Actuator

Sensor

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Clutch

Pickup Roller

FeedRoller

Drive Motor

Ver. 1.0

Separation Roller a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor and the Drive Motor start driving the Gears.

b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.

The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and transported by the

Intermediate Roller.

c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller starts rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.

d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

310

SEP 2006

< Paper Tray Lift up Mechanism >

Pickup Roller

Feed Roller

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Lift Plate

Bottom Plate

Ver. 1.0

a. When inserting the Paper Tray into the machine, the NP Sensor activates. At the same time, the Lift

Plate is combined with the coupling which drives the Lift Plate of the machine. The Lift Plate rotates, lifting the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper.

b. Once the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper are raised, the Upper Limit Sensor is turned ON.

The Lift DC Motor stops rotating, maintaining the recording paper at the certain level.

311

SEP 2006

< Paper Tray Recording Paper Size Setting >

Upper Limit Sensor

Lift DC Motor

Coupling a. The Recording Paper size in the Paper Feed Module is set on the Touch Panel.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

312

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

2. Sheet Bypass

< NP Sensor Operation >

a. The NP Actuator attached to the Paper Feed Unit determines if there is paper in the paper tray.

b. The paper in the paper tray lowers the NP Actuator and the NP Sensor actuates.

< Sheet Bypass Operation >

Feed Roller

Pressure Plate

Ver. 1.0

Sparate Roller

NP Actuator

NP Sensor a. When the printing operation begins, the PRINT (Print Request Signal) turns On and the Main Motor starts driving the Gears.

b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper Feed

Roller. The paper is raised by the Pressure Plate and transported to the Separate Roller. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separate Roller.

c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. d. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the

Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.

After lowering the Pressure Plate during the specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF and the Paper Feed Roller stops rotating.

e. After the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

313

SEP 2006

6.4.2.

Laser Unit

Beam Detection

Sensor

Beam Detection

Lens

LSU Chassis

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Laser

Collimator Lens

Aperture

Cylindrical Lens

Polygon Mirror/

Polygon Motor

F Lens

Cover Glass

Beam Detection

Reflection Mirror

1. Laser

This Laser uses the semiconductor laser. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.4 mW.

2. Collimator Lens and Cylindrical Lens

These lenses converge and focuse the laser beam, converting it to parallel light.

3. Aperture

This controls the size of the laser beam.

4. Polygon Mirror and Polygon Motor

The polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror, directly driven by a DC motor, revolving at 42,000 rpm. The laser beam is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the scanning direction.

5. Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor

The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor, which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line.

6. F-

θ Lens

This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the drum, providing a constant scanning speed.

7. Cover Glass

This prevents a particle of dust invading into the LSU.

314

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6.4.3.

Fuser Operation

The paper passes through the Fuser Roller and is subjected to heat and pressure in the Fuser Unit.

Pressure between the Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller fuses or bonds the toner into the paper.

Separators

Recording Paper

Pressure Roller

Exit Roller

Fuser Roller

Thermistor Assembly

Thermal Fuse

Fuser Lamp

Fuser Roller

A Teflon coated roller supplies heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the surface is kept constant at approximately 180

°C (± 10°C) or 356°F. (Approximately 190°C (± 10°C) or 374°F for

DP-8020 only.)

Fuser Lamp

Located in the Fuser Roller is the Fuser Lamp that serve as the heat source for the Fuser Roller.

Thermistor Assembly

A heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller, monitors the surface temperature and keeps the temperature at the specified level by controlling the Fuser .

Thermostat and Thermal Fuse

The Thermostat and the Thermal Fuse are installed in the Fuser Roller, providing an extra overheat protection.

Printer Motor

The Main Motor provides the driving force to the Fuser Roller through the Fuser Roller Gears.

Pressure Roller

This converted PFA tube Silicon Sponge Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding the toner to the paper.

When the Fuser Unit does not reach the specified temperature within a certain period of time, an Error code is shown on the display, stopping the operation.

When the Thermistor Assembly is disconnected or the surface temperature of the Fuser Roller is out of limit, an Error code is shown on the display, stopping the operation.

315

Thermostat

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6.4.4.

Printing Process Operation

The Process Unit consists of Developer Unit, OPC Drum unit and Toner Bottle with Toner supplied. Toner is supplied to the Process Unit.

The Process Unit includes the Toner Paddle and Mag Roller that supplies Toner to the OPC Drum.

The Cleaning Blade is attached to the OPC Unit. The Cleaning Blade scrapes the OPC Drum surface to remove the excess toner on the surface of the OPC Drum into the Toner Waste Chamber. The removed toner is moved into the Toner Waste Container by means of Toner Waste Paddle and Toner Waste Screw.

Toner Bottle

Cleaning Blade

Bias Charge Unit

Recording Paper

Toner Waste Paddle

Toner Waste Screw

Doctor Blade

OPC Drum

Magnet Roller

Toner Screw 1

Toner Screw 2

Process Unit

Developer Unit

1. Construction of the Developer a. The developer unit consists of the Magnet Roller, Sleeve and Toner Screws.

b. The developer is mixed and charged by the Toner Screws where it is transferred to the developer sleeve. The developer on the sleeve forms a brush by the magnetic force of the Magnetic Roller, and makes contact with the electrostatic latent image on the drum. Toner is attracted to the areas of the drum which have been discharged by the laser.

c. The Doctor Blade regulates the height of the magnetic brush which is formed by the developer which is attracted to the sleeve of the Magnetic Roller.

d. The TDC sensor is an inductance type sensor used to measure the ratio of toner to developer.

e. A dust collector vacuum duct is provided over the developer unit to prevent toner dusting. The dust collector is duct connected to the dust collector fan mounted on the machine frame which vacuums the scattered toner to prevent toner dusting over the developer unit.

2.

Developing

a. The developer mixing unit contains developer which is a mixture of fine powder (non-magnetic toner) and fine ferrite carrier.

316

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P b. The developer is mixed by the Toner Screws. The toner becomes negatively charged ( ñ ) and the carrier becomes positively charged ( + ). The developer is magnetically attracted to the aluminum sleeve of the Magnetic Roller, and the magnetic brush is formed.

c. The Magnetic Roller sleeve rotates in a counterclockwise direction. The height of magnetic brush is controlled by the gap between the doctor blade and the sleeve surface.

d. The drum, with an electrostatic latent image, is rotated clockwise and makes contact with the magnetic brush.

e. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the electrostatic latent image on the drum.

f. Charge (developer bias) is applied to the Magnetic Roller sleeve, which prevents toner from moving to the non-image area of the drum. The distance between the drum and the sleeve is controlled by the drum spacers.

Ver. 1.0

317

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7 Installation

7.1. Set Up Precautions

Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.

Machine performance, and copy quality is subject to, and dependant on environmental conditions.

To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:

1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:

• Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.

Ambient conditions Temperature

: 50 - 86

°F (10 - 30 °C)

Relative humidity : 30 - 80 %

• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity

• Exposed to direct sunlight

• Dusty environment

• Poorly ventilated location

• Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)

• Exposed to strong vibration

• Exposed to direct air current (ex: Air conditioner vent)

2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:

DP-8020E / 8020P / 8016P : Approx. 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 k g)

Options:

DA-AS202 / DS181 (iADF / ADF)

DA-DS185 / DS184 (Paper Tray)

: Approx. 20.5 lb (9.3 k

: Approx. 20.7 lb (9.4 k g) / 11.0 lb (5.0 kg) g) / 19.8 lb (9.0 kg)

3. The maximum power consumption is 1.3 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC / 15 Amps, or 220-240 VAC / 10 Amps accordingly. If you have doubts regarding a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)

4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas, or water pipe)

5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.

6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side, and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.

Using the space requirements shown on the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it requires, and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.

318

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Space Requirements

Main Unit

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

16.14 in (410 mm)

Main Unit + ADF

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

Main Unit + i-ADF

10.83 in

(275 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

319

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7.2.

Unpacking

Visually check the condition, and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before installation.

Remove all tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.

Caution:

Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 k g) without any options. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel, and the proper equipment to lift, or move the machine.

4

5

6

7

2

3

8

No.

1

Qty.

1 Main Unit

Description Remarks

Platen Cover is Optional for USA /

Canada, etc

1 Process Unit

1 Paper Size Label

1 AC Power Cord

1 Quick Guide

1 Operating Instructions CD

1

Panasonic-DMS and Print Driver CD

1 Installation Instructions

For Copy & Network Scan Functions

Includes Operating Instructions

This document

Note:

1. Supplies (Developer, Toner Bottle, and Toner Waste Container) are not included and are sold separately.

2. Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number(s), Packing, and Accessories detail.

2

4

3

6, 7

5

8

1

320

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7.3. Installation Procedure

Note:

1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.

2. The following machine illustrations, depict a DP-8020E with a standard configuration.

3. The scanner is locked in place with a Shipping Screw (Blue) to prevent damage during transit.

Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner.

4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller locked in the opened position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Roller.

Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller.

7.3.1. Installation Procedure

<Unlocking the Scanner>

(1) Remove the Protective tape from the Battery.

(2) Remove the Tape.

(3) Remove 1 Blue Screw.

(4) Store the Blue Screw into the space provided in the 1st Paper Tray.

<Unlocking the Pressure Roller>


(6) Remove 2 Tapes.

(7) Remove 2 Blue Screws.

Ver. 1.0

321

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(8) Store the Blue Screws into the space provided in the 1st Paper Tray.

<Preparing the Process Unit>

(9) Remove the Tape.

(10) Unhook 2 Springs as illustrated.

Note:

Do not remove the Protective Sheet and Tape from the OPC Drum Assembly at this time.


(12) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction of the arrow and remove.

Caution:



Caution:


OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light.


2

(1000 lx).

322

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(13) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the

Developer Cover.

(14) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).

(15) Pour the developer evenly into the developer unit by turning the Black Gear as illustrated. Make sure to empty the bottle.

(16) Close the Developer Cover, and ensure that 5

Latch Hooks are hooked firmly.

Note:

When closing the Developer Cover, ensure that the Developer Dispersion Sheet is on the outside.

(17) Reinstall the OPC Drum Assembly.

(18) Reattach 2 Springs.

(19) Reconnect the Harness.

Ver. 1.0

323

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(20) Route the Harness under the Harness Shield as illustrated.

Note:

To prevent damage to the Harness, ensure it is under the Harness Shield.

<Installing the Process Unit>


(22) Remove 1 Screw.

(23) Remove the Connector Cover.

(24) Carefully remove the Protective Sheet, and

Tapes from the OPC Drum Assembly.

Note:

Do not tilt the Process Unit, or the Developer will spill.

324

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(25) Install the Process Unit.

Caution:

To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure that the Left Cover is still open before inserting the

Process Unit into the machine.

Caution:



(26) Fasten the Process Unit with 1 Screw.

(27) Connect the Harness, and reinstall the

Connector Cover, and Screw.

(28) Install the Toner Waste Container.

(29) Close the Front, and the Left Covers.

(30) Load paper into the Paper Tray.

Caution:

Ensure that all shipping tapes and packing materials are removed.

Caution:

Do Not install the Toner Bottle, and Do Not

make any copies before performing the Toner

Density Control (TDC) Adjustment first, or the TDC

Adjustment will not be precise.

Ver. 1.0

325

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(31) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power

Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the

ON position.

Note:

Perform the following adjustments after the machine has warmed up, and displays:

<For USA / Canada etc> (Skip to Sect. 7.3.3.)

READY TO COPY

COPIES:001

<For Europe and Other Destinations only>

DP-8020E (**) ***

DESTINATION CODE :

PRESS \/ /\ TO SELECT

Note:

The contents in the (**) *** in the LCD display above may differ depending on the destination.

7.3.2. Setting the Default Destination (For Europe and Other Destinations only)

1. Press "V" or "

/\

" arrow keys to select the desired destination.

2. Press the "Set" key.

3. Press the "1" key for YES.

After the machine has warmed up, it displays:

READY TO COPY

COPIES:001

4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF, and back to the ON position.

Ver. 1.0

326

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7.3.3. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment

Note:

Ensure the Toner Bottle is not installed, or is removed before performing the TDC Adjustment, or adjustment will not be precise.

1. Press "Function", "Original Size", and "3" keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.

2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).

3. Press the "Start" key.

4. Press the "0", "9", and "Start" keys sequentially to begin the automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.

Note:

Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle is finished

(approximately 3 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.

F8-09 (Performed after Developer Installation & Replacement)

TDC Adjust

3 min

7.3.3.1. OPC Counter Reset

1. Press the "Start" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).

2. Press the "1", "4", and "Start" keys sequentially to proceed "14" (OPC Counter Reset).

F8-14 (Performed after OPC Installation & Replacement)

OPC Counter Reset

1-2 sec

3. Press the "6", and the "Start" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).

4. Write down the contents of F6-21, and 26 onto the memory sheet (adhered to the inside the 1st Paper

Tray).

[For your convenience, record these values on this sheet first, then transcribe them onto the memory sheet.]

F6-21 = TDC Gain Voltage

F6-26 = TDC Judgement Level

5. Press the "Stop" key.

6. Press “Function”, and “Clear” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

7.3.4. Installing the Toner Bottle


(2) Remove the Toner Waste Container

(3) Shake the Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to loosen the contents.

(4) Remove the Tape as illustrated, however, do not open the Shutter, or Toner will spill.

Caution:

Do Not install the Toner Bottle, and Do Not

make any copies before performing the Toner

Density Control (TDC) Adjustment first, or the TDC

Adjustment will not be precise.

327

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(5) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit.

Align the Toner Bottle Key with the Key

Alignment Channel of the hopper unit. Insert the

Bottle as far as it will go, and turn the Toner

Bottle clockwise until it locks in place. (Bottle's

Green Knob is lined up with the "Locked" symbol on the label)

Caution:

Do Not install the Toner Bottle before installing the Process Unit first. If the Toner Bottle is installed, and turned to the "Locked" position without the Process Unit, the Toner will spill inside the machine.

(6) Install the Toner Waste Container.

(7) Close the Front, and the Left Covers.

(8) Load paper into the Paper Tray.

Caution:

Ensure that all shipping tapes, and packing materials are removed.

7.3.5. Paper Size setting (Paper Tray) for your customer

1. Press the "Function" key.

2. Select "1: GENERAL SETTINGS", and press the "Set" key.

3. Select "09 KEY OPERATOR MODE", input the 3 Digit Code (default is 000) to enter the Key Operator

Mode, and press the "Set" key.

4. Select the "01 PAPER SIZE", and press the "Set" key.

5. Press "V" or "

/\

" arrow keys to select a New Paper Size, and press the "Set" key.

6. Press the "Reset" key, to exit the General Settings Mode.

7.3.5.1. Serial Number Setting for the Maintenance Report


2. Press the "9" key to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).

3. Press the "Start" key.

4. Press the "5", and the "Set" keys.

5. Input the Machine’s Serial Number, and press the "Set" key.

6. Press the "Stop" key twice.

7. Press "Function", and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

328

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

7.3.6. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)

Caution:

Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18, and 19) are set to "0".

DO NOT adjust these settings in the field.

F6-17 : Grid Voltage compensation

F6-18 : Standard Laser Power compensation

F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage compensation

Note:

If an exposure adjustment is required during a routine service call, ensure the developer unit is properly toned before making any adjustments.


2. Press the "2", and the "Start" keys to enter the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

3. Set the exposure to the center position.

4. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.

5. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N: FQ-SJ1011), and compare the density to the chart shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (14).

a. Gray scale "A" should not be visible.

b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A

1

.

2

3

Not visible

(Not visible, or hardly visible)

Clearly visible

6. Press the "Stop" key to exit the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

7. Press the "6", and the "Start" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).

8. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).

9. Press the "Set" key to highlight the current value.

10. Enter a new value (up to 3-digits).

Note:

The "Reset" key is used to change to a Negative, or Positive (+/-) value.

(+) : Lighter

(-) : Darker

11. Press the "Set", and "Stop" keys.

12. Enter F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).

13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.

Note:

Repeat Steps (3) to (10) until the desired density is attained.

F6-49 : T Mode Image Density (Text)

F6-51 : P Mode Image Density (Photo)

14. Press "Function", and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

7.3.7. User Authentication, and/or Via Fax Server Function Confirmation

(

Specified Destinations only

)



329

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8 Options and Supplies

8.1.

Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation

for DP-8020/8016

To use G3 Fax (DA-FG180) the standard firmware must be updated, also to use PCL (DA-PC820), or PS

(DA-MC820) option individually, changing to Type B, or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options.

Note:

The 8 MB Expansion Board (DA-EM600) must be installed for the printer controllers above to function.

The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is, if you are installing the PostScript (PS), or PCL option.

Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read, and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option.

The firmware for SC, and SPC must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.

Firmware Version Table

SC

SPC

Slot 1 FROM PCB

Standard Firmware

(SC = Type A)

PCL Firmware

(SC = Type B)

PostScript Firmware

(SC = Type D)

DP-LL80AxVxxxxx_xx DP-LL80BxVxxxxx_xx DP-LL80DxVxxxxx_xx

LL80SPCAxVxxxxx

Not Required

←

Required

←

Required

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)

The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.

The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover

cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.

Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.

The installation password is "workio".


\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Setup:

\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe




330

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Example:

From:



To:



Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.

Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).


Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the

Main Unit's Firmware Codes.



Sub Firmware File Folder





Transferring Order

1

1

1

2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware

Type.


Note:

1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware, or changing the type of the firmware.

Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection

Tab" of the Operating Instructions.


3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating

through the USB Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.


2. Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.






Setup:


331

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P




Example:

From:



To:




Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.


Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.



Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File


DP-LL80AxVxxxxx_xx.bin


DP-LL80BxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-LL80CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin

DP-LL80CxVxxxxxb.bin


DP-LL80DxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-LL80ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin

DP-LL80ExVxxxxxb.bin


LL80SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin

Transferring

Order

1

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-1

1-2

1-3

2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.


Note:


2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.


332

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

3. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)

1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).




3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.



6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).

7. The firmware is copied into the machine.

8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby.


10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.


12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default.

Note:

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby mode.


Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9

Parameters F9-02-xx.

Caution:

If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.7.8. (Firmware Emergency

Recovery)

3.1. Creating a Master Firmware Card

A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit






Setup:





Example:

From:



To:


3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card





2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB) into/from the machine.

333

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.

(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.

B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB)




2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB, or 8 MB) into the machine.



5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).

6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.

7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.


9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.


11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

3.2. Erasing the Master Firmware Card




2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.



5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO

START”. Press “STOP”.



9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.

10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

4. User Authentication, and/or Via Fax Server Function Confirmation

(

Specified Destinations only

)



334

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.2.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC820)

8.2.1.

Contents

No.

1

2

3

Qty.

1 Hardware Key

1 Software CD

Description


1 2

Remarks

PDL KEY


This document

3

Note:

Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number(s), Packing, and Accessories detail.

8.2.2.

Installation

1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot

1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-

EM600).

2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.

CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the

AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax

Option is installed.)

(1) Remove 10 Screws.

(2) Remove the Rear Cover.

Ver. 1.0

335

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(3) Install the Hardware Key into the (CN67) connectors on the SC PC Board.

Note:

The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the

SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.



ON position.

(6) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL

Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service

Notes".

(8) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the

Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

Ver. 1.0

336

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.3.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC820)

8.3.1.

Contents

No.

1

2

3

4

Qty.

1 Hardware Key

1 Software CD

Description

1 Adobe PostScript 3 Label


1

2 3

Remarks

PS KEY


This document

4

Note:


8.3.2.

Installation

1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot

1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-

EM600).

2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.

CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the

AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax

Option is installed.)



Ver. 1.0

337

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67) on the SC PC

Board.

Note:

The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the

SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.


If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.

(5) Plug the AC Power Cord and turn the Power


ON position.


(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL

Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service

Notes".

(8) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(9) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front

Cover as illustrated.

Ver. 1.0

338

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.4.

Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG180)

8.4.1.Contents

Remarks

6

7

4

5

No.

1

2

3

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

1

Qty.

Description

1 FXB PC Board

1 MJR PC Board Assembly

1 MJR Harness

1 Key Assembly

1 Speaker

1 Speaker Spring

1 Telephone Line Cable

1 TEL Label

1 Line Label

1 Type Approval Label

1 Function Label

1 Telepermit Label

1 Stamp Assembly

1 Stamp Unit

2 Clamp

1 PCB Spacer

4 Screw (M3 x 6)

2 Screw (M3 x 8)

1 Quick Guide

1 Operating Instructions CD


2 3

Specified Destination

Specified Destination

For New Zealand only

For USA/Canada only

Other Destinations

For ADF

For Facsimile and Internet FAX/Email

This document

4 5

6

Ver. 1.0

8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

7

16

17 18

20

21

19

Note:

1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first.


339

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.4.2.Installation

Install the Hardware by following the steps below.

CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.


(2) Remove 2 Silver Screws.

(3) Remove the Left Scanner Cover.

(4) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws.

(5) Remove the Right Scanner Cover.


(7) Slightly lift the Control Panel Assembly.


(CN220).



(11) Remove the Panel Sub Cover.

340

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(12) Install the Key Assembly into the Control Panel

Assembly.

(13) Install the Speaker as illustrated.

(14) Connect the Speaker Harness.

(15) Install the Speaker Spring.

(16) Secure the Speaker Spring with 2 Screws.



Ver. 1.0

341

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(19) Remove the Lower Protective Tab on the Right

Cover for the LINE connection.

If installing an External Telephone, remove the upper protective tab as well.

(20) Attach the Line Label and TEL Label to the

Right Cover as illustrated.

(21) Secure the MJR Harness with the Harness

Clamps.

(22) Connect the MJR Harness to the MJR PC Board

(CN22 and CN25).

(23) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into the slots on the frame.

(24) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 2

Screws (M3 x 6).

(25) Connect the MJR Harness.

342

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

(26) Install 2 Clamps.

(27) Install the PCB Spacer.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(28) Plug the FXB PC Board into the SC PC Board with on Board Connector (CN80).

(29) Secure the FXB PC Board with 2 Screws

(M3 x 6).

(30) Secure the MJR Harness with the Harness

Clamps.

(31) Connect the MJR Harnesses to the FXB PC

Board (CN391, CN392 and CN393).

(32) Attach the Function Label (specified destination) on the upper right corner as illustrated.

Note: (For ADF or Platen)

Attach the Function Label as the same position as i-ADF.

343

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(33) Attach the Type Approval Label (specified destination) to the Rear Cover as illustrated.

Note: (For New Zealand only)

Attach the Type Approval Label and Telepermit

Label to the Right Side Cover as illustrated.





ON position.

(36) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable to the LINE Jack on the right side of the machine, and the other end to the Telephone

Jack on the wall.

<Installing the Stamp Assembly for i-ADF>

(37) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.

(38) Lower the Inverting Guide 2 Assembly.

(39) Install the Stamp Assembly.

(40) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 69) to adjust the

Stamp Position.

<Installing the Stamp Assembly for ADF>


(42) Detach the Hook and Loop Fastener on the left side of the Scanning Pad.

344

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(43) Install the Stamp Unit as illustrated.

(44) Install the Stamp Assembly.

(45) Close the Stamp Unit.

(46) Remove the edge of the Protective Sheet.

(47) Connect the Harness of Stamp Unit.

(48) Place the Harness into the Latch as illustrated.

(49) Reattach the Hook and Loop Fastener on the left side of the Scanning Pad.

(50) Close the ADF Unit.

(51) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 69) to adjust the

Stamp Position.

Ver. 1.0

345

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(52) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware

Note:

For other destinations, set the Function Parameter is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.

#005 (Destination Code).

PB : UK

000 : Austria

PF : France

001 : U.K.

PK : China

002 : Canada

PM: Germany

003 : Denmark

PP : Poland

004 : Taiwan

PS : Sweden

005 : Finland

PT : Taiwan

006 : Germany

PU : USA

007 : Netherlands

008 : Italy

009 : Spain

010 : Hong Kong

011 : Australia

012 : Switzerland

013 : Norway

015 : Portugal

016 : Ireland

017 : Belgium

018 : Sweden

019 : Turkey

020 : U.S.A.

021 : France

022 : New Zealand

025 : Japan

029 : Poland

030 : Czech

031 : Russia

032 : Greece

033 : Hungary

034 : Indonesia

035 : South Korea

038 : Malaysia

039 : China

045 : Thailand

048 : South Africa

049 : Singapore

050 : Universal

051 : East Euro

346

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(53) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below.

a. Press "FAX/EMAIL" key.

b. Press "FUNCTION" and then "7" keys.

c. Press "MONITOR" four times, then press "

∗ (TONE)" to enter the "SERVICE MODE".

d. Press "6" key or "V", "/\" arrow keys to enter "6 RAM INITIALIZE".

e. Press "V", "/\" arrow keys to enter "PARAMETER INITIALIZE".

f. Press "START" key. Wait approximately 10-20 seconds, the unit displays "COMPLETED", then the unit will return to Service Mode.

g. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

(54) Verify the position of the stamp on the document. If it is not within the desired location at the bottom of the document, you can adjust its position by following the steps below.

a. Press "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE", and "3" keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.

b. Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).

c. Press "69" to enter "STAMP POSITION ADJ".

d. Press "START" and enter a number (-50 to 50).

Note:

A positive number moves the stamp position closer to the trail edge of the document, conversely, a negative number moves it in the opposite direction.

To change the current sign to either +/-, press the "RESET" key. (Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/step) e. Press "OK" key twice.

f. Press "FUNCTION" and "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

(55) Proceed the communication test to ensure the Fax Option works properly.

Ver. 1.0

347

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18), is also installed.

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total is available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD18) is installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration from 200 to 1,000 Stations and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD automatically.

Note:

1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or

RDS as backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the

200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).

3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power

Switch) procedure was not followed.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>

The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:

The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address

Book.

When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-8020/1820.

1) The "DP-8020/1820" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.

2) The "DP-8020/1820 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of

Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-8020/1820.

b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:

1. Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management

System\Network MFP Utilities.

2. Click on Network Device Locator.

3. In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.

4. In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.

5. The Network Address Book Editor "DP-8020/1820" window appears, under the Address Book

Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.

6. When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on

File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).

7. Then click the OK button.

c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above.

d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-8020/1820 (Fax1000)".

Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.

(Refer to Help.) f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.

Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

348

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

8.5.

Installing the Keyboard Option (DA-KB180)

8.5.1.

Contents

5

6

3

4

No.

1

2

Qty.

Description

1 Keyboard Unit

1 Keyboard Sheet (English)

1 Keyboard Sheet (French)

1 Keyboard Sheet (German)

4 Screw


1

2

Preinstalled

Remarks

This document

5

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

6

3

4

Note:


8.5.2.

Installation

Install the Hardware by following the steps below.

CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the

AC Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)








Ver. 1.0

349

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(CN220).



(11) Remove the Control Panel Sub Base Cover.


Ver. 1.0

350

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(13) Replace the preinstalled Keyboard Sheet to the desired language.

Note:

Alphabet arrangement is dependent on the destination, and may differ.

(14) Route the Keyboard Harness through the access hole on the machine.

(15) Install the Keyboard Unit as illustrated.

(16) Secure the Keyboard Unit with 4 Screws.

Ver. 1.0

351

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(17) Connect the Keyboard Harness to CN234 and

Panel Harness to CN220 on the PNL1 PC

Board.





ON position.


(21) Set the parameter for the Keyboard Sheet by following the steps below.

Note:

The parameter can be set whether SCANNER or FAX Mode depends on which Option is installed.

<SCANNER MODE>

a. Press"SCAN/FILE".

b. Press the "FUNCTION", "1" and "SET" keys to enter the SET Mode. c. Press "2" and "SET" keys.

d. Press "6" key.

e. Press "1", "2" or "3" key to select desired Alphabet arrangement and press "SET" key.

"1" : QWERTY (English)

"2" : QWERTZ (German)

"3" : AZERTY (French) f. Press "STOP" key.

<FAX MODE>

a. Press "FAX/EMAIL".

b. Press the "FUNCTION" and "7" keys to enter the SET Mode. c. Press "4" and "SET" keys.

d. Press "64" and "SET" keys.

e. Press "1", "2" or "3" key to select desired Alphabet arrangement and press "SET" key.

"1" : QWERTY (English)

"2" : QWERTZ (German)

"3" : AZERTY (French) f. Press "STOP" key.

Ver. 1.0

352

SEP 2006

8.6.

Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18)

8.6.1.

Contents

5

6

3

4

No.

1

2

7

8

9

10

11

Qty.

Description

1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

1 DC PCB

1 HDD Cover

1 HD Harness

1 HDD2 Harness

1 DC12 Harness

2 Harness Clamp (Small)

4 Harness Clamp (Medium)

4 Screw (6-32 x 3/8)

6 Screw (M3 x 6)


1 2

Black

White

Remarks

This document

3

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

4

5

6

7

8

11

9

Note:


10

Ver. 1.0

353

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.6.2.

Installation

1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB

(DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required.

Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).

2. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.

CAUTION!







(5) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

Ver. 1.0

354

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Caution:

Do Not install the Toner Bottle before installing the Process Unit first. If the Toner Bottle is installed and turned to the "Locked" position without the

Process Unit, the Toner will spill inside the machine.



(9) Loosen 1 Screw.



Caution:


Caution:



Caution:


OPC Drum to direct sunlight, or bright light.


2

(1000 lx).

355

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



(14) Remove the Front Cover 1.


(16) Remove the Right Cover.


(18) Remove the Right Bracket.

(19) Install the HDD into the Right Bracket as illustrated.

Ver. 1.0

356

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(20) Secure the HDD with 4 Screws (6-32x3/8).

Note:

When securing the HDD, place it at the edge of a table as illustrated (cover the table to protect it from scratches).

(21) Install the DC PC Board.

(22) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Screws.

(23) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Small) and 3

Harness Clamps (Medium).

(24) Connect the HDD2 Harness to the HDD.

(25) Connect the HDD2 Harness to CN143, and

DC12 Harness to CN141 & CN142.

(26) Secure the HDD2 Harness with the 2 Harness

Clamps.

357

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(27) Connect one end of the HD Harness to the HDD.

See Note below.

(28) Secure the HD Harness and DC12 Harness with the Harness Clamps.

Correct

Key

HDD

Incorrect

Key

HDD

Note:

Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to the HDD correctly as illustrated.

1. The Key on the connector must be facing

Upwards.

2. Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into the HDD. However, the correct one is shown in the illustration (Harness comes out from the top of the connector).

(29) Install the HDD Cover.

(30) Secure the HDD Cover with 4 Screws.

(31) Reinstall the Right Bracket Assembly.

(32) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).

Ver. 1.0

358

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(33) Connect the HD Harness to CN59 and DC12

Harness to CN 145 on the SC PC Board.

(34) Secure the HD Harness, and DC12 Harness with the Harness Clamp.





ON position.


Ver. 1.0

359

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

CAUTION!

<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>

After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed

(similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER

(Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.

3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard

Disk Drive Unit and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.

4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position.

5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option installed.)

6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed

(indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power Off.

7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total is available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD18) is installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration from 200 to 1,000 Stations and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD automatically.

Note:

1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or

RDS as backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the

200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).

3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power

Switch) procedure was not followed.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>

The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:

The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address

Book.

When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-8020/8016/

1820.

1) The "DP-8020/8016/1820" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.

2) The "DP-8020/8016/1820 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of

Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-8020/8016/1820.

360

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:

1. Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management

System\Network MFP Utilities.

2. Click on Network Device Locator.

3. In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.

4. In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.

5. The Network Address Book Editor "DP-8020/8016/1820" window appears, under the Address

Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.

6. When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on

File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).

7. Then click the OK button.

c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above.

d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-8020/8016/1820

(Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.

(Refer to Help.) f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

Ver. 1.0

361

SEP 2006

8.7.

Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)

8.7.1.

Contents

No.

1

2

3

Qty.

1

2

1

Description

Expansion F-ROM Board

PC Board Support

Installation Instructions

Remarks

This document

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

1 2

3

Note:


8.7.2.

Installation

CAUTION!





Ver. 1.0

362

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(3) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1

(CN62), if it was pre-installed.

(4) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on the SC PC Board.

(5) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot

1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board and secure with the Supporters.

Note:

The Program Extension F-ROM Board must always be installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.





ON position.


Ver. 1.0

363

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.8.

Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB

(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B)

8.8.1.

Contents

No.

1

2

Qty.

1

1

Description

SDRM PC Board


16 MB

64 MB

128 MB

This document

Remarks

Note:


8.8.2.

Installation

CAUTION!





(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on the SC PC Board as illustrated.

Note:

Make sure to align the notch first and insert the

SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30

° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.





ON position.


364

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.9.

Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)

8.9.1.

Contents

Qty.

1

Description

Image Memory

Part No.

UE-410047 4 MB

UE-410048 8 MB

Remarks

Note:

1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.

2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.9.2.

Installation

CAUTION!



(1) Remove 1 Silver Screw.

(2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.

(3) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory

Card as illustrated.

Caution:

Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage to the card or machine.

(4) Reinstall the Cover.


Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.


365

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.10. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)

8.10.1. Contents

Qty.

1

1

Description

Accounting Software CD


Remarks


This document

8.10.2. Installation

1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18) is installed into the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18).

2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.

1) Press "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE", and then "3" keys sequentially to enter the Service

Mode.

2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters).


4) Press the "4", "2", and then "SET" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT.

COUNTER".

5) Press the "2", and then "SET" keys to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.

6) Press the "STOP" key.

Note:

The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "000", to ensure security it is recommended to change this code.

Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code:

• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode.

• Press the "START" key to select "01 KEY OPERATOR ID CODE".

• Press the "SET" key, and then input a new 3-digit ID Code.

• Press the "SET" key, and then press "STOP" key to exit F7 Service Mode.

7) Press "FUNCTION", and "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.

1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, and then select "V" or " " arrow buttons to select "GENERAL

SETTINGS", and press "SET" key.

2) Select "V" or " " arrow buttons to select "09 KEY OPERATOR MODE", and then input the

3-Digit Code, and press "SET" key to enter the Key Operator Mode.

3) Select "V" or " " arrow buttons to select "13 DEPT. COUNTER MODE".

4) Press "2", and then select "SET" keys.

5) Select "V" or " " arrow buttons to set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).

6) Press the "STOP" key to return to the standby mode.

366

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.11. Installing the Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AR202)


7

8

5

6

No.

1

2

3

4

9

10

Qty.

Description

1

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

1 Scanning Pad

2 Hinge Stopper

2 Hinge Cover

2 Hinge Cover 2

2 ADF Mounting Bracket

1 i-ADF OPS Actuator

1 i-ADF Rear Support Bracket

Remarks

for DP-2010E use only

9 Screw (M3 x 8)

4 Screws will not be used

8 Screw (M3 x 12)

11

2 Silver Screw (M4 x 10)

12

13

2 Thumb Screw (M4 x 10)


3

4

This Document

1

5

6

9 10 11

12

13

2

7

8

Note:


367

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


CAUTION!



(1) Using a Slotted Blade Screwdriver, remove the

OPS Actuator as illustrated.

Note:

Release the latch on the left side of the actuator with the Slotted Blade Screwdriver.

(2) Install the i-ADF OPS Actuator.

Ver. 1.0

(3) Install 2 ADF Mounting Brackets, and push down as illustrated.

(4) Secure 2 ADF Mounting Brackets with 8 Screws

(M4 x 12).

(5) Install 2 Thumb Screws (M4 x 10).

(One for each ADF Mounting Bracket)

Note:

When installing the Thumb Screws, do NOT tighten them. Leave a clearance of approx. 6-8 mm, as illustrated.

368

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(6) Install the i-ADF onto the ADF Mounting

Brackets.

Note:

a. Set the i-ADF in the direction of the arrow. b. Align the hallmark on the Right Side of the

Hinge Base, and the ADF Mounting Bracket as illustrated.

(7) Tighten 2 Thumb Screws (M4 x 10).

(8) Install 2 Hinge Cover 2.

(9) Secure the Automatic Document Feeder with 2

Silver Screws (M4 x 10).

(10) Install 1 Screw (M4 x 8) on the back of the left

ADF Mounting Bracket from the bottom as illustrated.



(13) Remove the Protective Sheet.

(14) Bend the Protective Tab on the Rear Cover approx. 180

° towards the inside of the machine as illustrated.

(15) Connect the i-ADF Harness to CN650 on the

SPC PC Board.

(16) Insert the Harness Clamp into the pre-drilled hole in the frame (from underneath).

Note:

Do not cut the Harness Clamp (Tie-Wrap) when servicing. Push the release clip on the side of the clamp to remove it.

369

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0


Copy Image Leading Edge

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(17) Before proceeding, install the other options first.

If finished, close the i-ADF.

(18) Reinstall the Rear Cover.

(19) Secure the Rear Cover with 10 Screws.



ON position.


(22) Using a 20 lb (80

g/m

2

) lined original, make a copy from the ADF to check the feed alignment.

Skewed to the right

(23) Check the alignment of the Copy Image. If the

Copy Image is skewed either to the Right or Left, adjust the ADF's alignment as follows: a. Loosen 5 Screws securing the ADF.

b. Using the Hallmark on the Right Hinge Base and the ADF Mounting Bracket as a guide, shift the ADF position by following the procedure below:

• When the Copy Image is skewed to the right, shift the ADF slightly toward the front of the machine.

• When the Copy Image is skewed to the left, shift the ADF slightly toward the rear of the machine.

c. Tighten the 5 Screws loosened in step (a).

d. Repeat step (22) to recheck the feed alignment and readjust the ADF position as needed.

(24) Install 2 Hinge Stoppers.

(25) Secure 2 Hinge Stoppers with 4 Screws (M4 x

8).

370

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(26) Install 2 Hinge Covers.

Note:

When installing the Hinge Covers, make sure that a Hinge Film is placed inside of each Hinge Cover.

(27) Peel off 6 adhesive strip protectors from the

Scanning Pad.

(28) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning it on the upper left corner, keeping 1mm space as illustrated.

Note:

Failure to install the Scanning Pad correctly may cause a Black vertical, horizontal (or both) line(s) to appear on the copies in the Double Exposure

Copy Mode. Upon completing the i-ADF installation, verify that the Double Exposure operation.

(29) Close the i-ADF.

Note:

Reopen the i-ADF Unit, and push the Scanning

Pad gently to glue it properly.

(30) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 71, 72, 73, 90,

91, 92, 93, and 94) to adjust the i-ADF Scanning

Position.

Ver. 1.0

371

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

Document

No. 90 / 71

1-Side / 2-Side

ADF Detection

Timing

(ADF Image Read

Start Position

Adjustment)

No. 91 / 72

1-Side / 2-Side

ADF Original

Leading Edge

Registration

(Original Lead

Edge Detection

Timing Adjustment)

No. 92 / 73

1-Side / 2-Side

ADF Original

Trailing Edge

Registration

(Original Trail

Edge Detection

Timing Adjustment)

No. 93 / 94

1-Side / 2-Side

Magnification

Ratio (Top Feed)

(Ratio Adjustment

when the scan is made)

Paper

Travel

Paper

Travel

Paper

Travel

Reduced

Enlarged

A

A

A

Shadow of

Document

Leading Edge

Void

Shadow of

Document

Leading Edge

Void

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Adjustment

Adjustment

Amount

0.05mm

Remarks

1 Point

0.05mm

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.3mm

Rebooting is not necessary to enable the

Parameter

Setting.

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.1%

1 Point

0.1%

1 Point

< When Adjusting the ADF Unit >

Adjust the ADF Unit to scan the lined part

(inside of the margin 1.5 - 2.5mm) on the document as shown on the right.

Image

Data

372

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.11.3. Double Exposure Lead and Side Edge Adjustments

Caution:

Confirm that the Scanning Pad is installed, and aligned correctly on the ADF/i-ADF prior to making any adjustments.

1. Place a Business Card, Driver's License, Insurance Card, etc. (Invoice size or smaller) on the Platen

Glass as illustrated.

Driver's License

Platen

2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st Paper Tray, or onto the Sheet Bypass, and change the tray settings to the appropriate paper size.



a. For a Horizontal Black Line in the Center, adjust the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing) by following the steps below.




Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-63

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-64


6. Perform the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing) and F6-64 (Side Edge Read Adjust).

Note:




373

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.12. Installing the Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AS181)


Remarks No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Qty.

Description

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

2 Angle Plate

1 Scanning Pad

2 Screw (M3 x 8)

4 Screw (M3 x 12)

1 Installation Instructions This Document

1

2

3

4 5

6

Note:



CAUTION!



(1) Install the Automatic Document Feeder into the 2 Mounting Holes.

Note:

Before securing the ADF with 4 Screws, do not close the ADF, or the ADF may get damaged.

(2) Secure the ADF with 4 Screws (M3 x 12).

374

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006



DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(5) Remove the Protective Sheet.

(6) Bend the Protective Tab on the Rear Cover approx. 180

° towards the inside of the machine as illustrated.

(7) Connect the ADF Harness to CN650 on the

SPC PC Board.

(8) Insert the Harness Clamp into a pre-drilled hole in the frame (from underside).

Note:

Do not cut the Harness Clamp (Tie-Wrap) when servicing. Push the release clip on the side to remove it.

(9) Reinstall the Rear Cover.

(10) Secure the Rear Cover with 10 Screws.

Ver. 1.0

375

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Note:

Align the ADF if required by following the steps below.

(A) Release 4 Screws.

(B) Adjust the right side of the ADF, and the ADF

Mounting Bracket as illustrated.

(C) Secure the ADF with 4 Screws.


Scanning Pad.

(12) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass, aligning with the upper left corner, keeping 1mm space as illustrated. (Hook and Loop Fastening

Tape positioned to the Left Side of machine)

Note:

Failure to install the Scanning Pad correctly may cause a Black vertical, horizontal (or both) line(s) to appear on the copies in the Double Exposure

Copy Mode. Upon completing the ADF installation, verify that the Double Exposure operation.

(13) Close the ADF.

Note:

Reopen the ADF Unit, and push the Scanning Pad gently to glue it properly.

(14) Install 2 Angle Plates.

(15) Secure 2 Angle Plates with 2 Screws (M3 x 8).



ON position.


(18) Copy an Original using the ADF.

<Check the alignment of the Original's copy.

If the Copy Image is skewed, adjust the ADF's alignment as follows>

(19) Open the ADF Cover, and release the Stopper.

376

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(20) Open the ADF, and release 2 Latch Hooks under the feeder.

(21) Remove the ADF Front Cover.

(22) Remove 1 Screw, and turn the Adjusting

Bracket counter-clockwise.

Ver. 1.0


Copy Image

Leading Edge

Right

Skewed to the right

(23) If the Copy Image is Skewed to the right, set the

Adjusting Bracket to the right and secure it with 1

Screw.


Copy Image

Leading Edge

Skewed to the left

Left

(24) If the Copy Image is Skewed to the left, set the

Adjusting Bracket to the left and secure it with 1

Screw.

(25) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 90, 91, 92, and

93) to adjust the ADF Scanning Position.

377

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

Document

No. 90

ADF Detection

Timing

(ADF Image Read

Start Position

Adjustment)

Paper

Travel

A

No. 91

ADF Original

Leading Edge

Registration

(Original Lead

Edge Detection

Timing Adjustment)

Paper

Travel

No. 92

ADF Original

Trailing Edge

Registration

(Original Trail

Edge Detection

Timing Adjustment)

Paper

Travel

No. 93

ADF Magnification

Ratio (Top Feed)

(Ratio Adjustment

when the scan is made)

Reduced

Enlarged

A

A

Shadow of

Document

Leading Edge

Void

Shadow of

Document

Leading Edge

Void

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Adjustment

Adjustment

Amount

0.05mm

Remarks

1 Point

0.05mm

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.3mm

Rebooting is not necessary to enable the

Parameter

Setting.

1 Point

0.3mm

1 Point

0.1%

1 Point

0.1%

1 Point

< When Adjusting the ADF Unit >

Adjust the ADF Unit to scan the lined part

(inside of the margin 1.5 - 2.5mm) on the document as shown on the right.

Image

Data

378

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.12.3. Double Exposure Lead and Side Edge Adjustments

Caution:

Confirm that the Scanning Pad is installed and aligned correctly on the ADF/i-ADF prior to making any adjustments.

1. Place a Business Card, Driver's License, Insurance Card, etc. (Invoice size or smaller) on the Platen

Glass as illustrated.

Driver's License

Platen

2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st Paper Tray, or onto the Sheet Bypass and change the tray settings to the appropriate paper size.



a. For a Horizontal Black Line in the Center, adjust the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing) by following the steps below.




Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-63

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Driver's

License

Adjust with F6-64


6. Perform the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing) and F6-64 (Side Edge Read Adjust).

Note:




379

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.13. Installing the 2nd/4th Paper Tray (DA-DS184), 3rd Paper Tray

(DA-DS185), and the Stand


<DA-DS184> 2nd/4th Paper Tray

No.

1

3

6

7

8

Qty.

1 2nd/4th Paper Tray Unit

1

3

2

1

Description

Paper Size Label

Screw (M3 x 8)

Screw (M3 x 6)


Remarks

This document

<DA-DS185> 3rd Paper Tray

No.

1

3

6

7

8

Qty.

1 3rd Paper Tray Unit

1

3

2

1

Description

Paper Size Label

Screw (M3 x 8)

Screw (M3 x 6)


Remarks

This document

<DA1D18A / DA1D18B / DA1D18C> Deluxe Stand for USA and Canada only

No.

2

4

5

6

Qty.

1

Description

Deluxe Stand (DA1D18A)

Deluxe Stand (DA1D18B)

Deluxe Stand (DA1D18C)

3 Joint Bracket A

1 Joint Bracket B (Front Left)

3 Screw (M3 x 8)

Remarks

For 1-Paper Tray Configuration


For 3/4-Paper Tray Configuration

7

8

6 Screw (M3 x 6)

1 Installation Instructions This document

380

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<DA-DA188-PE / DA-DA189-PE / DA-DA190-PE / DA-DA191-PE >

Stand for Other Destinations

No.

2

4

5

6

7

8

Qty.

1

Description

Stand (DA-DA188-PE)

Stand (DA-DA189-PE)

Stand (DA-DA190-PE)

Stand (DA-DA191-PE)

3 Joint Bracket A

1 Joint Bracket B (Front Left)

3 Screw (M3 x 8)

6 Screw (M3 x 6)


1 2

Remarks





This document

3 5 6 8

4

7

Note:


2. The following illustrations, and instructions are for the DP-8020E with a 4-Paper Tray configuration. For 2 or 3-Paper Tray configuration skip the indicated steps.

8.13.2. Installing the 2nd, 3rd and 4th Paper Trays

CAUTION!



(1) Install 4 Joint Brackets as illustrated.

(2) Secure each Joint Bracket with 1 Screw

(M3 x 6).

381

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<Bottom Paper Tray Unit>


(4) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.

(5) Place the Paper Tray Unit onto the Stand.

(6) Slide the Paper Tray out of the unit.

(7) Secure the Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws

(M3 x 6, M3 x 8).

For a 3-Paper Tray Configuration, skip to

Step (19).

For a 2-Paper Tray Configuration, skip to

Step (30).

<3rd Paper Tray Unit>




(11) Remove 2 Brackets.

382

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(12) Place the 3rd Paper Tray Unit onto the 4th

Paper Tray Unit.

(13) Slide the 3rd Paper Tray out of the unit.

(14) Secure the 3rd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws

(M3 x 6, M3 x 8).

(15) Remove the Harness from Clamps of the 4th

Paper Tray Unit.

Note:

Close the right clamp and leave the left clamp open.

Caution:

Ensure that the Black Wire is on the Left Side, and that it connects to Pin 1 of the female connector as illustrated.

Inserting the connector upside-down, may damage the machine's SPC or CST PC Board.

(16) Route the 4th Paper Tray Unit's Harness through the access hole at the bottom of the 3rd Paper

Tray Unit as illustrated

(17) Connect the Harness of the 4th Paper Tray Unit to CN808 on the CST3 PC Board of the 3rd

Paper Tray Unit.

(18) Secure the Harness with the Clamp and Edge

Saddle while adjusting the harness length.

383

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

<2nd Paper Tray Unit>





(23) Place the 2nd Paper Tray Unit onto the 3rd

Paper Tray Unit.


(25) Secure the 2nd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws

(M3 x 6, M3 x 8).

(26) Remove the Harness from Clamp of the 3rd

Paper Tray Unit.

Note:

Close the clamp.

384

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Caution:



(27) Route the 3rd Paper Tray Unit's Harness through the access hole at the bottom of the 2nd Paper

Tray Unit as illustrated

(28) Connect the Harness of the 3rd Paper Tray Unit to CN772 on the CST2 PC Board of the 2nd

Paper Tray Unit.

(29) Secure the Harness with the Edge Saddle.





Ver. 1.0

385

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(34) Place the machine onto the 2nd Paper Tray

Unit.

Caution:

The machine weights approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel, and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.


(36) Secure the machine with 5 Screws

(M3 x 6, M3 x 8).

(37) Remove the Harness from Clamps of the 2nd

Paper Tray Unit.

Note:

Close the clamps.

Caution:



(38) Route the 2nd Paper Tray Unit's Harness through the access hole at the bottom of the machine Unit as illustrated

(39) Connect the Harness of the 2nd Paper Tray Unit to CN707 on the SPC PC Board.

(40) Secure the Harness with the Clamps and Edge

Saddle.



386

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(42) Attach the Paper Size Label(s) onto the 2nd/

3rd/4th Paper Tray(s) as illustrated.



ON position.


Ver. 1.0

387

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.14. Installing the Platen Cover (DA-UC200) for PU


Qty.

1

1

2

4

1

Platen Cover

Scanning Pad

Description

Platen Hinge

Screw


(2)

(1)

(2)

Part No.

DZMA002394

DZJM000428

Remarks

DZMH000013

XTB3+12JFJ

DZSM000303 This document

Note:




(1) Install 2 Platen Hinges.

(2) Secure the Platen Hinges with 2 Screws each.

(1)

(3)

(5) x6

(4)

(3) Install the Platen Cover.

(4) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning it with the upper left corner.


Scanning Pad.

(6) Close the Platen Cover.

Note:

Reopen the Platen Cover and push the

Scanning Pad gently to glue it properly.

Ver. 1.0

388

SEP 2006

6

7

4

5

No.

1

2

3

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

8.15. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit (DZTQ000074)

(Supplied as a Service Part)


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Qty.

Description

1 RLB PC Board Assembly

1 PTC-AC Harness 1

1 PTC-AC Harness 2

1 PTC-AC Harness 3

1 RLB Harness

1 Heater

2 Dehumidifier Heater

1 Heater Bracket

2 Dehumidifier Heater Bracket

1 Harness Bracket

1 Heater Switch Assembly

1 Switch Label

1

1

Heater Main Label

4 Clamp

1 Clamp

1 Clamp

14 Clamp

1 Clamp

1 Screw

Part No.

See Note

DZFP001639

DZFP001640

DZFP001641

DZFP001653

FFPCP0034

See Note

Remarks

FFPKD07791

DZJA001439

DZJA001438

See Note

DZNK005284

DZNK005283 English

PJGTC0053Z Chinese

DZJK000068

DZJK000046

DZJK000045

DZJK000023

DZJK000004

B3X6TTS-RP

20 7 Screw XTW3+6LFC

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000818

Note:



1

4

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

389

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


CAUTION!













(CN220).



(13) Remove the Rear Platen Cover and Left Platen

Cover.

(14) Remove the Platen (L) Glass and Scanning (S)

Glass.

390

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P




Caution:





(20) Loosen 1 Screw.


Ver. 1.0

391

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Caution:


Caution:



Caution:




2

(1000 lx).







(29) Remove the Right Bracket.

392

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(31) Remove the Front Left Cover.

(32) Remove the Inner Cover.


(34) Remove the Bottle Holder.

(35) Remove the Toner Spill Tray as illustrated.


(37) Remove the Main Switch.

(38) Release the Harness from 3 Harness Clamps.

(39) Install the RLB PC Board Assembly.

(40) Secure the RLB PC Board Assembly with 2

Screws.

Ver. 1.0

393

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(41) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000068) and 1 Black

Clamp(DZJK000004).

(42) Connect one end of the RLB Harness to CN171 on the RLB PC Board.

(43) Connect other end of the RLB Harness to CN2 on the PS PC Board.

(44) Secure the RLB Harness with the Harness

Clamp.

(45) Mount the Heater onto the Heater Bracket.

(46) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000023).

Ver. 1.0

394

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(47) Install 8 Clamps (DZJK000023) and 1 Clamp

(DZJK000068).


(49) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 3 to CN173 on the RLB PC Board.

(50) Route the PTC-AC Harness 3 through the holes in the frame as illustrated.

(51) Secure the PTC-AC Harness 3 with 6 Harness

Clamps.

(52) Route the PTC-AC Harness 3 through the hole in the frame as illustrated.


Clamps.

Ver. 1.0

395

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(54) Install the Heater Assembly.

(55) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.

(56) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 3 to the Heater

Assembly.


Clamps.

(58) Secure the PTC-AC Harness 3 with the Harness

Clamp.

Caution:

Do not remove the Dummy Plug, if the

Dehumidifier Heater Kit is not installed in the

Paper Tray.

(59) Slide the Scanner Unit.

(60) Mount the Dehumidifier Heater onto the

Dehumidifier Heater Bracket.

Ver. 1.0

396

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(61) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 1 to CN172 on the RLB PC Board.



Clamps.

(64) Route the PTC-AC Harness 1 as illustrated.


Clamps.



Clamp.



Clamps.

Ver. 1.0

397

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(70) Install the Clamp (DZJK000046).


Bracket and Harness Clamp.

(72) Secure the Harness Bracket with 1 Screw.

Caution:

Trim the excess length of the PTC-AC Harness 1 on the Panel Side.


(74) Remove the CCD Cover.

(75) Install the Clamp (DZJK000045).

(76) Install the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.

(77) Secure the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly with

1 Screw.

(78) Secure the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly with the Harness Clamp.

(79) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 1 to the

Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.


Ver. 1.0

398

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(81) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 2 to PTC-AC

Harness 1.


Clamp.


Bracket.

(84) Install the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.

(85) Secure the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly with

1 Screw.

(86) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 2 to the

Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.

(87) Connect the Harness to Heater Switch Assembly as illustrated.

(88) Install the Heater Switch Assembly.

(89) Secure the Heater Switch Assembly with 2

Screw.

(90) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.

(91) Attach the Heater Main Label and Switch Label to the Right Cover as illustrated.

Note:

Use the Heater Main Label to the desired language.





ON position.


399

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.16. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit for Paper Tray (DZHP009959)



Remarks

6

7

4

5

No.

1

2

3

8

Qty.

Description

1 PTC-AC Harness 4

1 Heater

1 Heater Bracket

1 Heater Cover

4 Clamp

2 Clamp

2 Edge Saddle

3 Screw

Part No.

DZFP001642

FFPCP0034

DZJE001205

DZJE001206

DZJK000023

DZJK000067

DZJK000017

B3X6TTS-RP

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000820

Note:



1

4

5

2

3

6

7

8

Ver. 1.0

400

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Before installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit for Paper Tray (DZHP009959), make sure the

Dehumidifier Heater Kit (DZTQ000074) is installed in the unit first.

CAUTION!







(5) Disconnect the Harness on the SPC PC Board

(CN707).

(6) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps and Edge Saddle.

(7) Route the Harness through a hole on the frame.

Ver. 1.0

401

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P



(10) Separate the 2nd Paper Tray from the machine.

Caution:

The machine weights approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(11) Mount the Heater onto the Heater Bracket.

(12) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000023) and 1 Edge

Saddle.

(13) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.

(14) Install the Heater Assembly.

Ver. 1.0

402

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(15) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 4 to the Heater

Assembly.

(16) Insert 2 Harness Clamp of the PTC-AC Harness

4 into a pre-drilled hole in the frame.


Clamps and Edge Saddle.

(18) Install the Heater Cover.

(19) Secure the Heater Cover with 2 Screws.



Clamp.

For a 2-Paper Tray Configuration, skip to Step

(54).



Ver. 1.0

403

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(CN772).

(25) Release the Harness from the Edge Saddle.




(29) Separate the 3rd Paper Tray from the 2nd

Paper Tray.

(30) Install the Heater, refer to Steps (11) - (21).

For a 3-Paper Tray Configuration, skip to Step

(47).




(CN808).

(34) Release the Harness from the Edge Saddle.


404

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(36) Slide the 3rd Paper Tray out of the unit.


(38) Separate the 4th Paper Tray from the 3rd Paper

Tray.

(39) Install the Heater, refer to Steps (11) - (21).

(40) Replace the 3rd Paper Tray Unit onto the 4th

Paper Tray Unit.

(41) Secure the 3rd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws

(XTW3+6LFJ, XTB3+8GFJ).

(42) Remove the Dummy Plug.

(43) Install 1 Edge Saddle.


(45) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 4.


Clamp and Edge Saddle.

(47) Place the 2nd Paper Tray Unit onto the 3rd

Paper Tray Unit.

(48) Secure the 2nd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws


405

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0


(50) Install 1 Edge Saddle.

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P





(54) Place the machine onto the 2nd Paper Tray

Unit.

Caution:

The machine weights approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(55) Secure the machine with 5 Screws



(57) Remove the Bracket.

406

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


(59) Install 1 Clamp (DZJK000023) and 1 Edge

Saddle.









ON position.


Ver. 1.0

407

SEP 2006

8.17. Installing the Mechanical Counter (DZTK000002)



Qty.

1

Description

Mechanical Counter

Remarks

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Note:



CAUTION!






Ver. 1.0

408

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Caution:





(7) Loosen 1 Screw.



Caution:


Caution:



Caution:




2

(1000 lx).

409

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P






(15) Remove the Inner Cover.


(17) Remove the PS Cover.

Note:

When reinstalling the PS Cover, ensure that the

PS Cover is installed into the Ground Plate as illustrated.

(18) Install the Mechanical Counter to the machine.

Ver. 1.0

410

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(19) Connect the MC Harness to the Mechanical

Counter.

(20) Cut the Protective Tab on the Front Cover 1.





ON position.


Ver. 1.0

411

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.18. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DA-KH180)


Note:

The Key Counter is sold separately.

Qty.

1

1

1

3

1

1

6

2

Description

KEY Harness

Counter Guide

Key Counter Base

Key Counter Cover

Key Counter Front Cover

Clamp

Screw

Screw

Part No.

DZFP001902

DZJB000463

PJUIC0218Z

PJUIC0219Z

PJUIC0221Z

DZJK000070

XTB3+6FFJ-RP

XTW3+6LFJ

Remarks

2 Screw XSB4+10FJ

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000825 This document

Note:




CAUTION!





Ver. 1.0

412







(9) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover.

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P




Caution:





(15) Loosen 1 Screw.


Ver. 1.0

413

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Caution:


Caution:



Caution:




2

(1000 lx).






(23) Install the Counter Guide.

(24) Secure the Counter Guide with 2 Screws

(XTW3+6LFJ).

414

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(25) Connect the KEY Harness to CN726 on the

SPC PC Board.

(26) Install 3 Clamps.

(27) Secure the KEY Harness with 4 Harness

Clamps and 1 Edge Saddle.

(28) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.

(29) Reinstall the Right Cover.

Caution:

Route the KEY Harness through the hole on the

Right Cover.

Ver. 1.0

415

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(30) Install the Protective Tab that was cut Step (28).

(31) Install the Key Counter Base.

Caution:

Route the KEY Harness through the hole on the

Key Counter Base.

(32) Secure the KEy Counter Base with 2 Screws

(XSB4+10FJ).

(33) Insert the Harness Clamp into the pre-drilled hole in the Key Counter Base (from underneath).

(34) Install the Key Counter.

(35) Secure the Key Counter with 2 Screws

(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).

Ver. 1.0

416

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(36) Connect the Key Counter Harness to the KEY

Harness.

(37) Install the Key Counter Cover.

(38) Secure the Key Counter Cover with 4 Screws

(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).





ON position.


Note:

If you are not installing the Key Counter at this time, cover the opening with the Key Counter

Front Cover and secure it with 4 Screws

(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).

Ver. 1.0

417

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

8.19. Replacing the OPC Drum

Note:

To avoid Toner spill in the machine, follow the steps below before removing the Process Unit.

1. Press "FUNCTION" and "1 SIDED COPY" keys simultaneously.

2. The LCD shows “Please wait...” for approx. 5 sec. Then it will be ready.





Caution:





418

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

(7) Loosen 1 Screw.


DP-8020E/8020P/8016P


Caution:


(10) Unhook 2 Springs.


(12) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction of the arrow and remove.

Caution:



419

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(13) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.

(14) Remove the Roller Spacer.

(15) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the left side where the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was installed.

(16) Ensure that the OPC Drum is fully coated with the Drum Starting Powder. Apply additional

Drum Starting Powder onto the surface of the

OPC Drum if required.

Note:

Do not touch the surface of the OPC Drum with bare hands when removing or reinstalling it.

Grease from fingerprints will affect copy quality.

Caution:




2

(1000 lx).

(17) Install the new OPC Drum onto the OPC Drum

Shaft Holder.

(18) Insert the OPC Drum Assembly into the Process

Unit.

(19) Reinstall the Process Unit, Toner Bottle and the

Toner Waste Container.

(20) Close the all Covers.

(21) Perform the Copy Service Mode F8-14 (OPC

Counter Starting Point Adjustment) to clear the

OPC Drum Counter.

420

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9 General Network Information

9.1.

Network Protocol

9.1.1.

OSI Reference Mode

Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.

The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and

Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.

Layer Name Function Protocol

7 Application

6

5

4

3

2

1

Presentation

Session

Transport

Network

Datalink

Physical

SMB

SMTP

FTP

DNS

HTTP

Telnet etc...

NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...

TDI

TCP, UDP

IP, IPX, etc...

IP Address etc...

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

Net BEUI

Apple Talk etc...

PPP...

NIC

SW Hub

Repeater

Hub

ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

Router

MAC Address

Ethernet

Token Ring

FDDI

RS-232C, X21...

ATM etc...

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

421

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.1.2.

Protocol

One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or

Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.

TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an

RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the

Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.

The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.

Layer

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base

Application

Application

Presentation

Session

Transport

Network

Data Link

Physical

Transport

Internet

Network

Interface

Function

This layer embraces functions of the OSI

Session, Presentation and Application layers. Protocols at this layer provide network services.

Compares to OSI Transport layer.

Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork.

Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks.

Corresponds to the bottom two layers of the OSI model. This correspondence enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network.

Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

9.1.3.

Cable

For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.

Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100

Ω.

Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.

Category

1

2

3

4

5

Purpose

Voice grade telephone line

ISDN

10Base-T Token Ring (4M)

Token Ring (16M)

100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

422

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.2.

Layer Functions and Technology

9.2.1.

MAC (Media Access Control)

The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.

These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner.

For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.

XXXXXX XXXXXX

Unique value

Manufacturer ID

PCC : 080023

9.2.2.

Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection.

The General sequence is as follows:

Wait for the next available timing to send,

Send out a frame,

Perform collision sensing simultaneously,

Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.

(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)

802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Most significant bit

Pre-amble

8 byte

Destination MAC address

6 byte

Source MAC address

6 byte

Data type

2 byte

Data

Least significant bit

46 1500 byte

FCS

4 byte

Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)

If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer.

Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately.

Token Passing

Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit.

When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.

The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

423

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame.

When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.

Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.

Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.

Token Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit

Start De-limiter (SFD)

1 byte

P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)

1 byte

Data Frame Format

P: priority

S: Status

0 = Token Frame

1 = Data Frame

R: Reserved

Most significant bit

SFD

1 byte

Access

Control

1 byte

Frame control

1 byte

Destination

MAC

6 or 2 byte

Source

MAC

6 or 2 byte

Data FCS

4 byte

Least significant bit

ED

1 byte

Frame

Status

1 byte

Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)

Max 17779 (16M)

There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

Ver. 1.0

424

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.2.3.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe

10Base-T)

Speed (bps) Topology

10Base-5 10M Bus

Cable Type

Yellow cable

10Base-T 10M

100Base-TX 100M

Star

Star

Max Length

500 m (1640 ft)

Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)

Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 100 m (328 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

Logical speed

(Mbps)

10

10

Max length (x 100m)

BASE 5

BASE

BASE : baseband (digital)

BROAD: broadband (analog)

T

TP Twisted Pair hyphen "-" means type of cable no "-" means max length

Ethernet Configuration

Ver. 1.0

425

SEP 2006

TX (+)

1 1

TX (-)

2 2

RX (+)

3

6

3

RX (-)

Straight Cable

6

1

TX (+)

2

TX (-)

1

2

3

RX (+)

3

6

RX (-)

6

Crossed Cable

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.

The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.

"1" "0"

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

0 V

-2.05 V

Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.

If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent.

The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.

There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.

9.2.4.

Repeater

The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions.

They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated.

Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.

9.2.5.

NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

426

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.3.

Network Layer

9.3.1.

IP Address

An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.

The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class

C addresses.

Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.

Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.

Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID.

There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than

223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.

Class A : First octet reserved for the network address

Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address

Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A 0

Class B 1 0

Class C 1 1 0

Network address represented as

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:

Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255

Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

427

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.3.2.

Subnet Mask

A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.

IP

192.168.32.1

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0

1

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

192

168 32 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

255 255 255

0

IP

Subnet Mask

Network

Address

192.168.32.0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Network Address Configuration

Global IP

Address

190.0.0.0

255.255.0.0

190.0.3.2

255.255.255.0

190.0.3.3

255.255.255.0

Third

Floor

190.0.3.1

255.255.255.0

Router

190.0.2.1

255.255.255.0

190.0.2.2

255.255.255.0

190.0.2.3

255.255.255.0

Second

Floor

190.0.1.3

255.255.255.0

Ground

Floor

Note

Upper: IP address

Lower: Subnet mask

190.0.1.1

255.255.255.0

190.0.1.2

255.255.255.0

Class B Subnet Outline

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.

1. Host address is set to all “0”

2. Host address is set to all “1”

Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.

3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”

IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.

Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.

4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”

Reserved for default route for non-destination address

5. Most significant bit starting with “127”

Reserved for loop back address

428

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.3.3.

Internet Protocol

The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.

It performs the following typical functions:

1. Identifies the IP address

2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram

3. Routing of the IP address

4 byte

Version

Internet

Header Length

ID

Time To Live

Type Of Service Total Length

Flags

Protocol

Source Address

Destination Address

Option + Padding (size varies)

Fragment Offset

Header Checksum

Data

IP Datagram

Terms Detail

Version

Internet Header

Length

Type Of Service

Currently version 4

IP Header field length

ID

Flags

Fragment Offset

Time To Live

Protocol

Header Checksum

Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence)

Identification frame number for upper layer communication

Packet disassembly information

Offset from most significant bit

Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router

Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)

Checksum is used for error checking on the header data

Source Address Sender’s IP Address

Destination Address Destination’s IP Address

Option

Padding

When implemented

Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit

429

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.3.4.

Router

Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address.

Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information.

These are the typical functions:

1. Routing

This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.

2. Packet Filtering

This performs the access and security control for specified routing.

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

192.168.32/24

192.168.33/24

Router B

PC-A

192.168.32.1/24

OK

PC-B

192.168.32.2/24

OK

PC-C

192.168.33.1/24

permission denied

PC-D

192.168.33.2/24 permission denied

Packet Filtering Sample

3. Address Conversion

NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address.

4. IP Masquerade:

This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.

At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.

Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX

(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer.

5. Designated Reply

These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.

Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well known techniques to keep a live connection.

430

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.4.

Transport Layer

9.4.1.

TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)

The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.

The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Header

(20 byte)

TCP Header

(20 byte)

IP Datagram

TCP segment

Application Data

(vary)

TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)

Sequence Number (4 byte)

Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)

Header Length

(4 bit)

Reserved

(6 bit)

Control Flag

(6 bit)

Checksum (2 byte)

Window (6 byte)

Urgent Pointer (2 byte)

Option PAD

Data (Segment)

TCP Segment Outline

Ver. 1.0

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

431

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Client

SYN, Sequential No

.=4538970

Increments No. sequentially

ACK, ACK No

.=4538971

SYN, Sequential No

.=1919424000

ACK, ACK No.=1919724001

Server

Panasonic

Device

TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart

The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.

The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The

ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

Ver. 1.0

432

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.5.

Upper Layer

9.5.1.

DNS (Domain Name System)

The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources.

Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain

Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:

Panasonic.com

Mail.panasonic.com

ifax.panasonic.com

can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.

Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names

(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device.

This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name.

Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.

• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.

• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.

• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.

• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.

• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

Panasonic

Device

3

2

1

10

DNS Server

4

DNS Server (root)

DNS Server (jp)

6

8

5

9

7

DNS Server (co.jp)

Mail Server

DNS Name Resolution Sample

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.

There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

433

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:

1. Query the local DNS Server.

2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.

3. The “Com” root DNS Server sends the query to the “jp” root DNS Server.

4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.

5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.

6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.

All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To

Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary

Name Server.

9.5.2.

Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

9.5.3.

Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.

Ver. 1.0

434

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.5.4.

SOA (Start of Authority) Record

Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows:

IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>

An example of the syntax is shown below:

;

; File: db.127.0.0 file

; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.

; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the

; default parameters for information this DNS is

; authorized for:

;

@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (

951213 ; serial number

43200 ; refresh every 12 hours

7200

1209600

; retry after 2 hours

; expire after 2 weeks

172800)

;

; default ttl is 2 days

IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

;

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.

The following list explains the other parameters:

* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.

* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]).

* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.

* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.

* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.

* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.

* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

435

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.5.5.

A (Address) Record

The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.

; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy

; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais

; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720

; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy

$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.

rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (

721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )

IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.

IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216

qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212

ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26

ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

9.5.6.

PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.

DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.

They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:

<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>

IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

;

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

9.5.7.

CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:

<alias name> CNAME <host name>

Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

436

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.5.8.

NS (Name Server) Record

The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below:

<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>

An example of a name server record follows below:

@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp

The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name server.

9.5.9.

MX (Mail Exchange) Record

The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.

If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:

<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>

For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.

9.5.11. Forwarding

A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands.

There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.

For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &

Associates, Inc.

437

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.6.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel.

The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-

SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a

MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an

OK reply.

The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http:// www.imc.org/rfc821

Internet

SMTP Server

PC DNS Server

SMTP

POP Server

POP 3

PC

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

9.6.1.

Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35

by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157

for <[email protected]>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)

Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)

Message-Id: <[email protected]>

Mime-Version: 1.0

X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic

From: "Panasonic" <[email protected]>

Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX

To: [email protected]

Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

Delivery route

Message ID

Content-Type

438

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.7.

ITU T.37 and RFC2305

9.7.1.

Mode of Operation

The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.

Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.

Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.

Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.

9.7.2.

Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Required

Strongly

Recommended

Optional

Sender

Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file

Provide notice in case of local transmission problem

Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant

Include Message-ID

Use Base 64 encoding for image data

Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiver

Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications

Required

Optional

Receiver

Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place

MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than display

Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single message

Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems

Use other TIFF Profiles

439

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Required

Strongly

Recommended

Optional

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Offramp Gateway (when implemented)

Be SMTP compliant

Provide delivery failure notification

Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address

Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmission

Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminals

Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification

Use DSN for delivery failure notification

Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users

Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminal

Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

9.7.3.

Definitions and Abbreviations

IETF

RFC

MIME

POP3

SMTP

DSN

MDN

TIFF

IFD

Offramp gateway

Mailstore

Notice

Internet Engineering Task Force

Request For Comment

Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions

Post Office Protocol version 3

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Delivery Status Notification

Message Disposition Notification

Tagged Image File Format

TIFF Image File Directory

Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/

G4 facsimile terminals

Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver

Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to be determined by the device

RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

File Format for Internet Fax

Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Subtype Registration

Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail

Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail

A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail

Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile

RFC2301

RFC2302

RFC2303

RFC2304

RFC2305

RFC2306

440

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.7.4.

File Format for Internet Fax

Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.

S (MH)

B/W

Color

C (JPEG)

J

(JBIG)

F

(MMR, MR)

L (JPEG) M (MRC)

MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.

J

C

S

F

L

Class

M

Color Coding Method

B/W MH

B/W

B/W

MMR, MR

JBIG

Color

Color

Color

JPEG (lossy)

JPEG (lossless, grayscale)

Mixed Raster

Content

Remarks

Internet Fax minimal set

Internet Fax full mode

Internet Fax mixed mode

Color minimal set

One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous tone color and grayscale images

Multiple coders and resolution within a page

Ver. 1.0

441

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.7.5.

Minimal Set

The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.

The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.

Baseline Fields

Bits Per Sample

Compression

Fill Order

Image Width

Image Length

New Sub File Type

Page Number

Photometric Interpretation

Resolution Unit

Rows Per Strip

Samples Per Pixel

Strip Byte Counts

Strip Offsets

X Resolution

Y Resolution

Extensions Fields

T4 Options

Values

1

3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4

Least significant bit first

1728 (A-4)

N: total number of scan lines in image

2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document

N, m: page number n followed by total page count m

0: pixel value 1 means black

2: inch

Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip

1

Number of byte in TIFF strip

Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip

204, 200 (pixels/inch)

98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)

0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs byte aligned

9.7.6.

Addressing

A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to

PSTN-based services.

(1) Offramp

FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com

Global-phone

Service selector

Domain

(2) Sub address

(3) Others

FAX= +3940 / T33S=183@ faxworld.org

Sub address

Selector

Global-phone

Service selector

VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com

Global-phone

Service selector

Domain

Domain

442

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Note:

For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words

“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,

“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in

RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119

1. MUST

This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification.

2. MUST NOT

This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification.

3. SHOULD

These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course.

4. SHOULD NOT

This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.

9.7.7.

Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Value Offset

Value Offset

Header

IFD (Page 0)

Long Values

Image Data

(Page 0)

IFD (Page 1)

Long Values

Image Data

(Page 1)

IFD (Page 2)

File Structure

First IFD Offset

Next IFD Offset

Strip Offset

Next IFD Offset

Strip Offset

Ver. 1.0

443

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Message Header Contents

9.7.8.

Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.

9.7.9.

Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.

The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

444

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.8.

Communication Protocols

The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.

Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:

SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

TCP 3 Way

Handshake &

Opening Session your Panasonic Device

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

SMTP Server

(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

[5 minutes]

220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready

[5 minutes]

[5 minutes]

HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com

250 ef1.labo.pcc.com

MAIL FROM: <[email protected]>

250 OK

RCPT TO: <[email protected]>

250 OK

DATA

[2 minutes]

[3 minutes]

[3 minutes]

250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

DATA BLOCK 1

DATA BLOCK 2

[10 minutes]

DATA BLOCK n

CR/LF . CR/LF

250 OK

QUIT

221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing transmission channel

Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:

1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or

2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.

A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.

The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

445

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.8.1.

Opening and Closing

At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing:

HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>

QUIT:<CRLF>

In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.

9.8.2.

Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.

9.8.3.

RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.

9.8.4.

Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.

9.8.5.

Send

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

9.8.6.

Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.

9.8.7.

Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

9.8.8.

Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

9.8.9.

Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

446

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

450

451

452

500

501

502

503

504

550

551

552

553

554

211

220

221

250

251

354

421

9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

System status or system help reply

<domain> Service ready

<domain> Service closing transmission channel

Requested mail action okay# completed

User not local; will forward to <forward-path>

Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>

<domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel

[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]

Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox busy]

Requested action aborted: local error in processing

Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage

Syntax error# command unrecognized

[This may include errors such as command line too long]

Syntax error in parameters or arguments

Command not implemented

Bad sequence of commands

Command parameter not implemented

Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]

User not local; please try <forward-path>

Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation

Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed

[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]

Transaction failed

Ver. 1.0

447

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.9.

POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)

9.9.1.

Introduction

On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an

IP-style network for long amounts of time.

The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.

For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939

9.9.2.

Basic Operation

Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.

Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable

ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.

Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-

ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.

Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet

(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.

Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than

CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing

".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.

A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.

In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the

TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed.

A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

448

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’ duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

9.9.3.

POP3 Command Summary

Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name

PASS string

QUIT valid in AUTHORIZATION state

STAT

LIST [msg]

RETR msg

DELE msg

NOOP

RSET

QUIT valid in the TRANSACTION state

Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state valid in the TRANSACTION state TOP msg n

UIDL [msg]

POP3 Replies:

+OK

-ERR

Note:

With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply.

From: To:

Ver. 1.0

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

449

SEP 2006

Ver. 1.0

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

POP 3 Server

(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

AUTHORIZATION


+OK POP Server ready

<[email protected]>

USER s50055

+OK Password required for s50055

PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).

STAT

+OK 2 126040

QUIT

+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE


+OK POP Server ready

<[email protected]>

USER s50055

+OK Password required for s50055

PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).

TOP 1 1

+OK 69762 octets

Text DATA

Text DATA

PETR 1

+OK 69752 octets

Text DATA

Text DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

DELE 1

+OK Message 1 has been deleted.

TOP 2 1

+OK 1 56288 octets

Text DATA

Text DATA

PETR 2

+OK 1 56288 octets

Text DATA

Text DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

DELE 2

+OK Message 2 has been deleted.

QUIT

+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

450

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC

Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.

One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.

Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network

PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.

Command

Ping

Ipconfig /all

Tracert

Netstat

Net view

Nslookup

Sample

Ping 192.168.1.30

Ipconfig /all

Purpose

Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination

(192.168.1.30)

Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,

WINS etc)

For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of

Ipconfig/all

Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination

(192.168.2.245)

Netstat

Netstat -nr

Active connection list

Active route for your subnet.

All special assigned IP addresses are also shown

Net view

Nslookup

Checking for the current file sharing Host Name

Checking for the DNS server IP address.

This command is available for Windows NT only.

Note:

Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

Ver. 1.0

451

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)

START

Is the LAN connected to an ISP

Yes

No

Is static IP address available ?

No No

Is this a Dialup connection ?

Yes

Not supported

DHCP Client?

Yes

Is G3 Gateway function being used ?

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic

Device in the DNS table ?

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Is POP account available ?

No

Is POP account available ?

No

Set network parameters for POP receiving

If not ready

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic

Device in the DNS table ?

No

Not supported

Yes

Yes

Set network parameters for SMTP receiving

If not ready

Set network parameters for

POP receiving and set G3

Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device

If not ready

No

Not supported

Ask the Network

Administrator to setup a new POP account.

Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

Ask the Network

Administrator to setup a new POP account.

Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

Important Notice:

Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models, the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.

Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.

452

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature

DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.

The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.

The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP.

DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.

DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.

In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.

In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address).

In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.

"DHCP client"

A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address.

"DHCP server"

A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.

Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.

Message Comments

DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.

DHCPOFFER

DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address.

DHCPACK

Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration parameters.

DHCPNAK

Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address.

Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired

DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.

DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.

DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has externally configured network address.

Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

453

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.

Server

(not selected)

Client Server

(selected)

Begins initialization

Determines configuration

DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines configuration

DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER

Collects replies

Selects configuration

DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

Initialization complete

Commits configuration

Graceful shutdown

DHCPRELEASE Discards lease

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.

Server Client Server

Begins initialization

Locates configuration

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

Locates configuration

Initialization complete

Subsequent

DHCPACKS ignored

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address

454

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.

Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.

INITIALIZATION

INITIALIZE/

REBOOT

-/Send DHCPREQUES

DHCPNAK/

Restart

DHCPACK

(not accepted)/

Send DHCPDECLINE

DHCPNAK/

Discard offer

-/Send DHCPDISCOVER

REBOOTING

SELECTING

DHCPOFFER/

Collect replies

DHCPNAK, Lease expired/

Halt network

Select offer/ send DHCPREQUEST

REQUESTING REBINDING

DHCPNAK/

Halt network

DHCPOFFER/

Discard

DHCPACK/

Record lease, set

/timers T1,T2

DHCPACK/

Record lease, set

/timers T1,T2

DHCPACK/

Record lease, set timers T1, T2

T2 expires/

Broadcast

DHCPREQUEST

BOUND

T1 expires/

Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server

DHCPACK/

Record lease, set timers T1, T2

T1 expires/

Send

DHCPREQUEST to leasing server

RENEWING

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client’s lease will expire.

To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from the following URL: http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

455

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature

The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet

Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents

(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.

(1) Delivery confirmation (required)

(2) Additional document features (optional)

In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.

Your Panasonic device supports MDN.

Delivery Status Notification (DSN)

A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support

DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

SMTP Server

DSN

SMTP Server fail

N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.

SMTP Server SMTP Server

MDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.

456

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from the Options menu of Outlook Express.

MDN request

MDN notify

Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.

MDN Response

Read Receipt

Capabilities

(1)

MDN Request

Internet FAX (3)

SMTP Server SMTP Server

(2) Internet FAX

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging

(1) Request

If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message

Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.

Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using following formula.

457

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0


Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit

Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500


From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <[email protected]>

Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX


Disposition-Notification-To: <[email protected]>

Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the

Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.

MDN Response Sample

MESSAGE

HEADER

Mime-Version: 1.0


Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit

Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500


From: <[email protected]>

Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX


In-Reply-To: <[email protected]>

References: <[email protected]>

Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

BODY

TEXT

ATTACHED

FILE

********** Read Receipt **********

This message was opened by

’[email protected]’

dd Mmm yyyy 15:42

******************************************

Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected]

Original-Message-ID: <[email protected]>

Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched

Media-Accept-Features:

(& (type="image/tiff")

(color=Binary)

(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)

(MRC-mode=0)

(ua-media=stationery)

(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])

(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])

(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )

(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )

(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

458

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

(3) Processing Confirmation

The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.

For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

Ver. 1.0

459

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature

The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).

This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.

X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure.

It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that “http” & “html” are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.

From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature

The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called

APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-

Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.

Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.

An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality.

A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:

<process-ID.clock@hostname> where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.

460

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

Challenge Response

<[email protected]>

Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD

<[email protected]>PASSWD

Client

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)

+OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]>

APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

Server

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Possible Responses:

+OK

-ERR permission denied

Produces a 16 octet digest value of c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)

STAT

+OK 1

Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name'' parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.

When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.

Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.

Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

Ver. 1.0

461

SEP 2006

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

- Extended Feature

SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the

Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.

Client Server

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)

220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready

EHLO jgm.example.com

250-smtp.example.com

250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5

AUTH CRAM-MD5

334

PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA

ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

235 Authentication successful

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

SMTP AUTH overview

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply.

Challenge Response

334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

Produces a Challenge

BASE64 decoded string

<[email protected]>

Genrates Digest parameter

Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message

USER

Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:

Fred 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e

BASE64 encoded string

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a

334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

462

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a

501 reply.

If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.

The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".

Error Codes

The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.

432: A password transition is needed

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected

Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism.

538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.

454: Temporary authentication failure

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure.

530: Authentication required

This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or

QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

Ver. 1.0

463

SEP 2006

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of

SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by employing SMTP server.

Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries.

Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also.

In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System cannot be applied for

Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function.

Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.

So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization's Intranet.

Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication between Internet Fax communications.

Several service extensions are newly assigned.

(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"

(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command

Sender

Request for Capability

Establish TCP connection

220

EHLO

250 Response of CONNEG

MAIL FROM:<[email protected]>

250

RCPT TO:<[email protected]> CONNEG

250 Capacity Exchange

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview

Recipient

TCP Port No. 25

Checks for Capability

Capability contents sample

250-<[email protected]> recipient ok

250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)

250- (MRC-mode=0)

250- (color=Binary)

250- (|(&(dpi=204)

250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )

250- (&(dpi=200)

250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )

250- (&(dpi=400)

250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )

250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])

250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)

250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)

250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )

250- (size-x<=2150/254)

250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )

250 (ua-media=stationery) )

Ver. 1.0

464

SEP 2006

10 Schematic Diagram

10.1. General Circuit Diagram

CN80

CN392

CN390

FXB

CN391

1

2

3

4

CN393 nBZH1GH5 pBZCLK5 pSPENB

GND

CN22

CN25

CN20

MJR

CN21

SPEAKER to PNL1

*1

CN773

CST2

CN774

CN778 CN777

CN771

CN776 CN775

CN707

CN770

CN772

FAX (Option)

CN773

CN772

CN811

3rd TRAY

DRIVE MOTOR

CN806

CN808

CN805

CN804

CST3

CN800

CN771

CN774

CST2

CN778 CN777

CN770

CN776 CN775

*1

SORT

MEMORY

CN65

CN61

HARDWARE

KEY I/F

CN69

FRM

CN63

SLOT 2

FRM

CN62

SLOT 1

FROM

CARD

CN64

LAN I/F

CN68

CN67

CN66

CN73

CN74

CN75

SC

CN722

CN810

CN807

CN802 CN801 CN803

CN721

CN715

CCD

CN850

CN55

LSU

MOTOR

M

CN57

CN1

LSU

CN712

CN42

CCDHT

MCCDHT

Dehumidifier Heater (Option)

AC SW

1

2

1

2

RLB

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

AC(L)

AC(N)

LSUHT

CST4HT

CST3HT

CST2HT

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

C

PROCESS

UNIT

G

D

TRANSFER T

*2

COIL

CH48TA

COIL

CH35TA

6

7

8

9

10

3

4

5

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

20

21

22

18

17

16

19 nPRDY nVRDY nPACK nATT nDUPACK pBDA pVREQ nSACK nPVSYNC nDUREQ pSENTIM nSREQ pSPCRST nPRGDWN

GND

GND

IICSCL

IICSDA

GND nSCNWUP

SPCRXD

SPCTXD

6

7

8

9

10

3

4

5

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

20

21

22

18

17

16

19

CN701

CN728

SPC

CN727 CN706

CN709

M

1st TRAY

LIFT MOTOR

CN723

M

MAIN MOTOR

1

1

1

1

5

1

2

1

2

*1

ORIGINAL SIZE

SENSOR 2

ORIGINAL SIZE

SENSOR 1

CN710

SCANNING

LAMP

HVAC1

HVAC2

1

5

INV

CN1

CN656

CN650

SCANNING

MOTOR

M

CN655 CN657

14

15

16

11

12

13

1

4

5

2

3

GND

+24VM

ELPCNT

+24VM

TDREF

6

7

8

9

10

TDSEN

GND

GND nWTBSEN nTFSEN

LDWTB

LDTF

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

17

18

19

20

+5V

HUMISN

GND

TEMPSN

21

22

23

24

+24VM nCTCNT

1

2

3

4

1

2

1

2

3

4

4

5

1

2

3

3

4

1

2

3

4

2

1

1

2

PCL

WASTE

TONER

SENSOR

HUMIDITY

SENSOR

TOTAL

COUNTER

CN21

ADF

1

2

3 nAAPNT

GND

+5v

1

2

3

ORIGINAL

DETECTION

SENSOR

RELEASE LEVER

PLATE SOLENOID

REVERSING GUIDE 1

SOLENOID

DUPLEX 2 GUIDE

SOLENOID

STAMP

SOLENOID

ORIGINAL

LENGTH

SENSOR 2

ORIGINAL

LENGTH

SENSOR 1

1

3

2

4

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

2

1

2

1 nAPACHG

+24VOPC nAKEEP2

+24VOPC nAKEEP1 nAPICR

+24VOPF nASTAMP

+24VOPF

2

1

+5v

GND nAA3S

10

9

8 nAB4S

+5v

GND

7

6

5 nAADL2

+5v

GND nAADL1

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

7

6

ADF COVER

OPEN DETECTION

SENSOR

READ POINT

SENSOR

1

3

2

1

3

2

+5v

GND nAOAC

+5v

GND nAB1SN

4

3

2

1

6

5

G6

1

2

+24VOPF nCCLH3

6

7

4

5

8

9

1

2

3 nAEJC

GND

+5v nAB2SN

GND

+5v nAREV

GND

+5v

1

4

INVERTING

ROLLER

CLUTCH

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

EJECT

SENSOR

DUPLEX EJECT

SENSOR

ADF EXIT COVER

SENSOR

8

9

10

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

OUTA

+24V

IOUTA

OUTB

+24V

IOUTB

+24VOPF nCCLH2

+24VOPF nCCLH1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

4

1

4

M ADF

MOTOR

ADF ROLLER

CLUTCH

FEED 2 ROLLER

CLUTCH

G5

CN719

CN702

CN726 CN708

CN703

CN500 CN12

PS

2

1

AC(N)

AC(L)

2

1

To SPC

(CN721)

FUSER UNIT

THERMISTOR

FUSER LAMP

1

3

2

4

AC(L)

AC(L)

AC(N)

AC(N)

1

2

1

2

THERMAL FUSE THERMOSTAT

AC SW

1

AC(L)

2

AC(N)

E

1

2

3

INLET

L

E

N

Black

White

POWER CORD

CN10

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

+24V

GND

+5VP

+5VD

+5V

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

+3.3V

+3.3V

nLPOW1 nLPOW2 nVCNT

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

CN143

3

4

5

1

2

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

3

1

2

4

CNHD1

CNSHD1

4

5

6

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

3

4

5

1

2

13

14

15

16

4

5

6

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

+24V

GND

GND

GND

+5VP

+5V

PNLRXD

PNLTXD nPNLRST nLPOW2 nLPOW1 nSLPKY nWAKE nVCNT

8

9

6

7

10

3

4

5

1

2

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

4

5

6

1

2

3

SCN4

SCN5

SCN3

SCN6

KIN3

N.C.

KIN2

KIN7

KIN1

KIN0

+DAT

N.C.

+ALM

KIN4

+ACT

KIN5 nLEDACT

KIN6 nLEDALM

LEDCT0 nLEDDAT

LED9

LEDCT4

LED8

LEDCT3

LED7

LEDCT2

LEDCT1

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

4

5

6

1

2

3

8

9

6

7

10

3

4

5

1

2

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

13

14

15

16

3

4

5

1

2

CN221

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

12

13

14

3

4

1

2

KIN4

KIN5

KIN3

KIN6

KIN2

KIN7

KIN1

SCN11

KIN0

SCN10

SCN8

SCN9 nOPT

GND

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

12

13

14

3

4

1

2

1

2

3

4

*1 nBZH1GH5 pBZCLK5 pSPENB

GND

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

3

4

5

1

2

+SLP nLEDSLP nSLPKY

GND

LEDCT0

BZ+

LEDCT1

BZ-

LED6

SCN2

KIN0

KIN1

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

3

4

5

1

2

LED0

KIN7

LED1

KIN6

LED2

SCN0

LED3

SCN1

LED4

KIN5

LED5

KIN4

LEDCT2

KIN3

LEDCT3

KIN2

LEDCT4

BAT+

9

10

7

8

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

4

5

6

1

2

3

CN223

HDD 40P

CN59

LCD

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

465

Ver. 1.0

SEP 2006

memo

DP-8020E/8020P/8016P

Ver. 1.0

466

SEP 2006

Panasonic

Software

Operating Instructions

Network Firmware Update Tool

for Service Technicians

Version 3

®

DZSD001829-14

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)


1.

General 3

1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2.

Installation 4

2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5

3.

Preparing the Firmware Update 6

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

3.1.2 For other models

6

6

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6

4.

Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1

3rd Edition : 2002 December 5

4th Edition : 2003 April 10


6th Edition : 2003 December 18


8th Edition : 2004 August 3


10th Edition : 2004 October 22

11th Edition : 2005 March 18


13th Edition : 2006 Maｙ 08

14th Edition : 2006 June 26

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.


The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

7

Page 2


1. General

The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the

Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS

•

Windows 98 / Me

• Windows NT 4.0

• Windows 2000

• Windows XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.

.

Page 3


2. Installation

2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.

Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

3.

Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\ Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

Enter the installation password.

Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.

4.

5.

Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

The completion message is displayed when the installation is completed.

Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.

2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network

Firmware Update, then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.

The Configuration dialog box appears.

General Tab

Please change the settings if necessary.

File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode

When you select this mode, the tool acquires the type of firmware and version from the device(s) of the specified address, and updates the device to the latest version from the “Local Firmware Folder”.

However, this mode cannot change the type of firmware, so you must use the manual mode when changing from the standard firmware to the option firmware.

Page 4

3.

Click [ OK] to finish the setup.


2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

2.

3.

4.

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.


For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware

Update, then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed.

Page 5


3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

1.

If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the

Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication.

2.

Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).

Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.1.2 For other models

1.

If the device password ( Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) is changed from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication.

For the 3-digit Key Operator Password devices, only the first three digits “000” of the default value are singled out of the 4-digit “0000” value.

2.

Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).

Note:

It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.

(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 6


4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.

Please close all applications that are currently running.

Note: When using the Network Firmware Update Tool on Windows 2000/XP OS, you must be logged on as an Administrator.

2.

From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.

Click [ Next>].

Note:

1) Make sure the device password (

Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation

Password) on the remote unit and the password on this application are set correctly.

2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).

3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote unit, or a communication error may occur.

4) Do not operate, or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the firmware update will fail, and the device will not boot up again.

5) If the Network Firmware Update fails, and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than

20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the Local Firmware Update Tool, or with the FROM card.

3.

Click [ Device Address List].

Page 7


4.

Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input, or Device Address List.

Click [ OK].

5.

Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [ Next>].

Page 8


6.

Specify the Firmware Code File using the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

--> Step 6a1

With this choice you can directly select the

Firmware Code Archive File.

The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically, and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

--> Step 6b1

If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the

Parent File Folder directly from here.

It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select Independent File Folders

--> Step 6c1

If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select independent file folders from here.

Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 is not shown.

6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete

Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

Page 9


6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file, and click [Open].

Ex: DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe

6a3 Extracting...

6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].

6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [ Next>].

Page 10

6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

Set)", and click [Browse...] button.


6b2 Select the Parent File Folder, and Click [OK].

Ex: \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228

6b3 Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].

Page 11


6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [ Next>].

Page 12

6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders", and click [Browse...] button.

6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder, and click [OK].

Ex: SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder, and click [OK].


6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [ Next>].

7.

The version check for the specified devices starts.

Click [ Next>].

Page 13


8.

Verify that the information you want to update is correct.

Then click [ Next>].

Note: If "Send at once" is checked, all firmware will be sent at once, and then erase, write and reboot.

If "Send at once" is checked out, each firmware (SC, PNL, SPC, etc...) are transmitted separately, and each time the unit erases, writes and reboots in the normal mode.

This "Send at once", function cannot be used if the model is DP-6010 / 4510 /

3510, firmware type is PCL or PS, and the unit SC version is V1.xxxx.

9.

Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.

Then click [ Next>].

Page 14

10.

Data is transferred to the Spooler, and the update is started.

The Spooler screen appears automatically showing the progress of the data transfer.

The spooler will take time to open depending on the number of addresses to update.

11.

When the transfers are completed, all jobs in the spooler disappear, and the communication log is displayed.

Click [Finish] to close the tool.

After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again automatically.


Page 15

Panasonic

Software

Operating Instructions

Local Firmware Update Tool

for Service Technicians

Version 3

®

DZSD000965-17

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)


1.

General 3

1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2.

Installation 4

2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4

2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4

2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5

2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6

3.

Preparing the Firmware Update 7

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7

4.

Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30

3rd Edition : 2000 September 8

4th Edition : 2000 November 28


6th Edition : 2001 September 7



9th Edition : 2003 December 18

10th Edition : 2004 January 19

11th Edition : 2004 February 10




15th Edition : 2004 October 22



Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.


The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

8

Page 2

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

1. General

The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash

Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface.

1.1 Supporting OS

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS

• Windows 98 / Me

• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)

• Windows 2000 / XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.

Page 3


2. Installation

2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine

1

2

Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.

Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic

Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.

Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and your PC.

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1


For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\ Setup.exe from the install disk.

3

Installation Destination Folder

Click [Next] button.

4

Program Folder

Click [Next] button.

Page 4

5

Copying...


6

The installation is completed.

Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)

1

After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware

Update Driver, please

set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service

Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed automatically.

2

Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service

Manual.

Searching...

Installing driver...

3

When the install screen disappears, the installation of the Firmware Update (USB)

Driver is completed.

Note:

1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.

2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the " Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation

3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1

4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the

Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.

Page 5


2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.


For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

3.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware

Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

4.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.

Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control

Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be deleted properly.

Page 6


3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.

(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 7


4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

1

2

3

Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel cable or USB cable.

Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the

USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver installation.

Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or

Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

Status Monitor

Port Controller

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using

Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware

Programming Wizard.

Click [ Next>].

Note: Please close all applications that are currently running.

Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

4

Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

Parallel.

Click [ Next>].

Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is only displayed if you installed it with the unit Plug and Play.

Page 8


5

Specify the Firmware Code File by the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

--> Step 5a1

You can select the Firmware Code Archive

File directly here.

The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

--> Step 5b1

If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the

Parent File Folder directly here.

It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select an Independent File

--> Step 5c1

If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select an independent file here.

When updating multiple firmware files, you must repeat the file selection operation.

5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete

Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe

5a3 Extracting...

Page 9


5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [

Next>].

Page 10


5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

Set)" and click

[Browse...] button.

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327

5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

Page 11


5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [ Next>].

Page 12


5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click

[Browse...] button.

5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].

ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [ Next>].

Page 13


6

The selected Firmware Code File(s) are indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need to transfer a file.

On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.

Click [ Next>].

7

The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

When there is more than one file to be updated, the operation will be the following;

For USB connected unit: they are transferred in turn automatically if the unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file.

Note: If you are updating the

DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn't done automatically. The

"Waiting..." display on the PC will not advance to "Executing..." until you set the unit back to USB Firmware

Update on the machine to start receiving the next file. See

Unit information of the Firmware

Update Mode on the next page.

For Parallel connected unit: the confirmation screen is displayed when the current firmware code file transfer is finished and there are remaining firmware code files.

Click [OK] when the machine is ready to receive the next file.

Page 14


Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):

Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file,

the unit does the delete and

rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to

USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the

firmware update.

When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the

PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.

8

For USB Connected Unit (Other models):

Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file,

the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the

firmware update automatically.

When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.

For Parallel Connected Unit:

Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service

Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.

When the transfers of all the firmware files are finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.

Note: For USB Connected Unit only.

When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup.

Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug and Play window.

Page 15

Published in Japan

Panasonic DP 8020E Service manual

Digital Imaging Systems

WARNING

General Annotations

The contents of this Service Manual, and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.

Published in Japan.

Important Notice

Please read these Instructions completely BEFORE installing any optional accessories. Installing the additional board, or connector with the power ON

(only the power switch OFF) could damage the SPC, and/or SC board.

If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power

Switch on the machine.

How to turn OFF the Power:

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER

(Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the

Power Switch on the machine to the

OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY

SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to

step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER"

keys simultaneously first.

3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while

the machine writes the closing status onto

the Hard Disk Drive Unit, and advances into

"ENERGY SAVER MODE".

4. Turn the Power Switch on the machine to the OFF position.

5. Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable, if the Fax Option

is installed.

6.

Unplug the AC Power Cord.

(When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when

servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. As a precaution, disconnect the Telephone

Line Cable first, before unplugging the AC Power Cord.

WARNING

Caution:

Depending on your machine’s model, it may weight approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg) without any options.

To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel to lift, or move

the machine as illustrated.

Do not lift the machine by the Paper Tray as it may cause damage and/or bodily injury.

:

Refer to the Installation Instructions when installing the machine.

Precautions

For Your Safety

WARNING

Power and Ground Connection Cautions

Operating Safeguards

Consumable Safeguards

Notice: California only:

CAUTION

Installation and Relocation Cautions

CAUTION

Operating Safeguards

Consumable Safeguards

Others

Replacement .......................................... 46

Check Points ........................................ 101

Table of Contents

Service Modes ..................................... 246

Table of Contents

1 Specifications

1.1.

Control Panel

1.2.

Specifications Table

1.2.1.

Copy Function

1.3.

Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions

1.3.1.

Fax Function

1.3.2.

Printer Function

1.3.3.

Network Scanner Function

1.3.4.

Internet Fax Function

1.4.

System Combination

1.5.

Options List

Options